descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle.
WEB EDITION
OWNER'S MANUAL
WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS.
We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual.
We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if
you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, please contact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contacting Volvo" for information on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.
Contents
01 Introduction
On-board owner's manual........................ 11 Owner's information.................................. 13 Contacting Volvo....................................... 13
01About this manual..................................... 14
Change of ownership................................ 18 Crash event data....................................... 18 Volvo Structural Parts Statement.............. 19 Information on the Internet....................... 20 Volvo ID..................................................... 21 Open Source Software Notice.................. 21 Volvo and the environment....................... 22 Important warnings................................... 23 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance.......... 24 Technician certification............................. 24
02 Safety
Occupant safety........................................ 26 Recall information..................................... 26 Reporting safety defects........................... 27
02Seat belts general.................................. 28
Seat belts buckling/unbuckling.............. 29 Seat belt reminder..................................... 30 Seat belts pregnancy............................. 30 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)..... 31 Front airbags............................................. 32 Occupant Weight Sensor.......................... 36 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 39 Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 41 Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)...... 42 Crash mode general information............ 44 Crash mode starting the vehicle............ 45 Crash mode moving the vehicle............. 45 Child safety............................................... 45 Child restraints.......................................... 47 Infant seats............................................... 49 Convertible seats...................................... 51 Booster cushions...................................... 53 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 54 Top tether anchors.................................... 56
Integrated booster cushion general information................................................ 57
Integrated booster cushion using.......... 59
Integrated booster cushion stowing...... 60
02Child safety locks...................................... 61
2
Contents
03 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview ................................. 64 Information displays introduction........... 68 Eco Guide* and Power Meter*.................. 71
03Information displays indicator symbols. 72
Information displays warning symbols... 74 My Car introduction............................... 76 Information displays ambient temperature sensor................................................ 77 Information displays trip odometer and clock......................................................... 78 Inserting/removing remote key................. 78 Ignition modes.......................................... 79 Front seats................................................ 80 Front seats folding backrest*................. 81 Front seats power seat.......................... 81 Key memory power driver's seat* and door mirrors.............................................. 83 Rear seats head restraints..................... 84 Rear seats folding backrest................... 86 Steering wheel.......................................... 87 Electrically heated* steering wheel........... 88 Lighting panel........................................... 89 High/low beam headlights........................ 90 Active high beams (AHB)*......................... 90
Tunnel detection (models with the rain sensor* only)............................................. 92 Active Bending Lights (ABL)*.................... 92 Auxiliary lights*.......................................... 93
03Instrument and "theater" lighting.............. 93
Parking lights............................................ 93 Rear fog lights........................................... 94 Hazard warning flashers........................... 94 Turn signals............................................... 95 Front interior lighting................................. 96 Rear interior lighting.................................. 97 Home safe lighting.................................... 97 Approach lighting...................................... 97 Windshield wipers..................................... 98 Rain sensor*.............................................. 98 Windshield washer.................................... 99 Tailgate wiper/washer............................. 100 Power windows....................................... 100 Power door mirrors................................. 102 Power door mirrors automatic tilting/ retraction................................................. 103 Heated windshield*, rear window and door mirror defrosters............................. 104 Interior rearview mirror............................ 104
Digital compass*..................................... 105 Power moonroof* introduction............. 106 Power moonroof* operation................. 107
03HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
introduction............................................. 108 HomeLink® Wireless Control System* programming........................................... 109 Volvo Sensus.......................................... 111 Information display menu controls....... 112 Information display menu overview..... 113 Information display messages............. 113 Trip computer introduction ................. 115 Trip computer functions, analog instrument panel.............................................. 116 Trip computer functions, digital instrument panel.............................................. 119 Trip computer Supplementary information.......................................................... 121 Trip computer Trip statistics................ 122
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Contents
04 Climate
Climate general information................. 124 Climate sensors................................... 124 Air quality................................................ 125
04Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*.......... 125
Climate menu settings......................... 126 Air distribution general......................... 126 Electronic climate control (ECC)............. 128 Heated seats........................................... 129 Ventilated seats....................................... 130 Temperature and blower control............ 130 Automatic climate control....................... 131 Air conditioning....................................... 131 Max. defroster and electrically heated windshield*.............................................. 132 Air distribution function........................ 133 Air distribution recirculation................. 134 Air distribution table............................. 135
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces....................................... 138 Tunnel console........................................ 140 Tunnel console 12-volt sockets........... 140
05Glove compartment................................ 141
Vanity mirror............................................ 141 12-volt socket in the cargo area*............ 141 Loading general................................... 142 Loading roof load carriers.................... 142 Load anchoring eyelets........................... 143 Floor rails and hooks general information.......................................................... 144 Floor rails and hooks moving............... 144 Floor rails and hooks removing............ 145 Floor rails and hooks inserting............. 145 Grocery bag holder................................. 146 Cargo net general information............. 147 Cargo area cover.................................... 149 Steel cargo grid....................................... 149
06 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade..................... 152 Remote key loss................................... 152 Key memory............................................ 153
06Locking/unlocking confirmation.............. 153
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 154 Remote key functions.......................... 155 Remote key range................................ 156 Detachable key blade general information.......................................................... 157 Detachable key blade detaching/reinserting..................................................... 157 Detachable key blade unlocking.......... 158 Private locking........................................ 158 Remote key replacing the battery........ 159 Keyless drive* locking/unlocking.......... 161 Keyless drive* unlocking with key blade....................................................... 162 Keyless drive* key memory.................. 162 Keyless drive* messages..................... 163 Keyless drive* antenna locations......... 164 Locking/unlocking from the outside..... 165 Manual locking........................................ 166 Locking/unlocking from inside............. 166 Locking/unlocking glove compartment 167
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Contents
Locking/unlocking tailgate................... 168 Power tailgate automatic opening/closing........................................................... 169 Power tailgate programming................ 170
06Power tailgate interruption................... 170
Power tailgate manual opening/closing 170 Alarm general information.................... 171 Alarm indicator........................................ 171 Alarm arming/disarming....................... 172 Alarm signal............................................ 172 Alarm turning off................................... 173 Alarm-related functions........................... 173
07 Driver support
Active chassis* (Four C).......................... 175 Stability system introduction................ 175 Stability system operation.................... 176
07Stability system symbols and mes-
sages....................................................... 177 Adjustable steering force*....................... 179 Road Sign Information (RSI)* introduction.......................................................... 179 Road Sign Information (RSI) operation 180 Road Sign Information (RSI) limitations 180 Cruise control (CC) introduction.......... 181 Cruise control (CC) engaging and setting speed............................................... 181 Toggling between ACC and CC (standard Cruise Control).................................. 183 Cruise control (CC) deactivating.......... 183 Adaptive Cruise Control introduction... 184 Adaptive Cruise Control function......... 185 Adaptive Cruise Control engaging....... 187 Adaptive Cruise Control setting speed 188 Adaptive Cruise Control setting time interval..................................................... 189 Adaptive Cruise Control deactivating.. 189 Adaptive Cruise Control passing another vehicle........................................ 191
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Queue Assist...................................................... 191 Radar sensor........................................... 193 Adaptive Cruise Control limitations...... 193
07Adaptive Cruise Control symbols and
messages................................................ 195 Adaptive Cruise Control troubleshooting........................................................... 197 Distance Alert introduction................... 198 Distance Alert operation....................... 198 Distance Alert limitations...................... 199 Distance Alert symbols and messages 201 City Safety introduction........................ 202 City Safety function.............................. 203 City Safety operation............................ 204 City Safety limitations.......................... 204 City Safety troubleshooting.................. 205 City Safety symbols and messages..... 207 City Safety Laser sensor...................... 208 Collision warning introduction.............. 209 Collision warning* function................... 211 Collision warning* operation................ 212 Collision warning* Cyclist detection..... 213 Collision warning* Pedestrian detection.......................................................... 214
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Contents
Collision warning* limitations............... 215 The camera's limitations......................... 217 Collision warning troubleshooting........ 218
07Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages....................................................... 220 Driver Alert System................................. 222 Driver Alert Control (DAC) introduction 222 Driver Alert Control (DAC) operation.... 223 Driver Alert Control (DAC) function...... 223 Driver Alert Control (DAC) limitations... 224 Driver Alert Control (DAC) symbols and messages................................................ 225 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) introduction.................................................... 227 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) operation.......................................................... 227 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations........................................................ 229 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols and messages................................. 230 Park assist introduction....................... 232 Park assist function.............................. 232 Park assist operation........................... 234 Park assist limitations.......................... 235 Park assist troubleshooting.................. 236
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) introduction.................................................... 236 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) function.......................................................... 237
07Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) opera-
tion.......................................................... 237 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) guiding and marker lines...................................... 238 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) limitations........................................................ 240 BLIS* introduction................................ 240 BLIS* function...................................... 241 BLIS* operation.................................... 242 BLIS* limitations................................... 242 BLIS* messages................................... 243
08 Starting and driving
Starting the engine.................................. 246 Switching off the engine......................... 248 Engine Remote Start (ERS)* introduction.......................................................... 248
08Engine Remote Start (ERS)* starting the
engine..................................................... 249 Engine Remote Start (ERS)* switching off the engine.......................................... 249 Jump starting.......................................... 250 Transmission general information........ 251 Transmission positions........................ 251 Transmission Geartronic...................... 253 Transmission shiftlock override........... 255 Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)......... 256 Start/Stop introduction........................ 256 Start/Stop function............................... 256 Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions......... 257 Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions......... 258 Start/Stop settings............................... 259 Start/Stop symbols and messages...... 260 ECO*....................................................... 261 All Wheel Drive (AWD)............................. 263 Hill Descent Control (HDC) introduction.......................................................... 263 Hill Descent Control (HDC) operation.. 264
6
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Contents
Brakes general..................................... 265 Brakes symbols ................................... 267 Anti-lock braking system (ABS).............. 267
08Brake lights............................................. 267
Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)....... 268 Parking brake general information....... 268 Parking brake applying........................ 269 Parking brake releasing........................ 270 Parking brake symbols and messages 271 Driving through water.............................. 272 Engine and cooling system..................... 273 Conserving electrical current.................. 273 Before a long distance trip...................... 273 Driving in cold weather........................... 274 Refueling fuel requirements................. 275 Refueling octane rating........................ 276 Refueling opening/closing fuel filler door......................................................... 277 Refueling opening/closing fuel cap...... 278 Emission controls.................................... 279 Economical driving.................................. 279 Towing a trailer....................................... 281 Detachable trailer hitch........................... 282 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA).................... 283
Towing the vehicle.................................. 284 Towing eyelet.......................................... 284 Towing by tow truck............................... 285
08
09 Wheels and tires
Tires general information...................... 288 Tires storage and age.......................... 289 Tires tread wear indicator.................... 290
09Tires tire economy................................ 290
Changing a wheel direction of rotation 291 Changing a wheel removing wheel...... 291 Changing a wheel spare wheel............ 294 Changing a wheel accessing the spare wheel....................................................... 295 Changing a wheel installing a wheel.... 295 Tire inflation general information.......... 296 Tire inflation checking pressure........... 297 Tire specifications................................... 298 Tire inflation pressure table.................. 300 Loading specifications............................ 301 Loading specifications load limit.......... 301 Tire specifications terminology............ 302 Tire specifications Uniform Tire Quality Grading................................................... 303 Snow chains............................................ 304 Snow tires/studded tires......................... 305 Tire pressure monitoring - introduction.. 305 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) general information.............................. 306
7
Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) changing wheels.................................. 307 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) recalibrating......................................... 308
09Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
activating/deactivating......................... 308 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) messages............................................. 309 Tire Monitor - introduction...................... 310 Calibrating Tire Monitor.......................... 310 Tire Monitor status information............... 311 Tire Monitor messages......................... 312 Self-supporting run flat tires (SST).......... 313 Tire sealing system* general information.......................................................... 313 Tire sealing system* overview.............. 315 Tire sealing system* sealing hole......... 316 Tire sealing system checking inflation pressure.................................................. 318 Tire sealing system* inflating tires........ 319 Tire sealing system* sealing compound container................................................. 320
10 Maintenance and servicing
Maintenance introduction.................... 322 Maintenance owner maintenance........ 323 Maintenance hoisting........................... 324
10Onboard Diagnostic System................... 325
Booking service and repairs .................. 325 Maintenance opening/closing hood..... 327 Engine compartment overview............ 328 Engine compartment engine oil........... 329 Engine compartment coolant............... 331 Engine compartment brake fluid.......... 332 Engine compartment power steering fluid......................................................... 333 Bulbs introduction................................ 334 Bulbs headlight housing....................... 335 Bulbs cover.......................................... 336 Bulbs low beam, Halogen.................... 336 Bulbs high beam, Halogen................... 337 Bulbs extra high beam......................... 337 Bulbs front turn signals........................ 338 Bulbs front side marker lights.............. 339 Bulbs location of taillight bulbs............ 339 Bulbs brake lights and taillights........... 340 Bulbs license plate lighting.................. 340 Bulbs cargo area lighting..................... 340
Bulbs vanity mirror lighting.................. 341 Bulbs specifications............................. 341 Wiper blades service position.............. 342
10Wiper blades windshield...................... 343
Wiper blades tailgate........................... 344 Engine compartment washer fluid....... 344 Battery symbols................................... 345 Battery handling................................... 345 Battery maintenance............................ 346 Battery changing.................................. 347 Fuses introduction............................... 348 Fuses engine compartment................. 350 Fuses glove compartment................... 354 Fuses cargo area/trunk........................ 357 Fuses engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only)...................................... 358 Washing the car...................................... 360 Automatic car wash................................ 361 Polishing and waxing.............................. 361 Cleaning the interior................................ 362 Touching up paintwork........................... 364
8
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11 Specifications
Label information.................................... 367 Dimensions............................................. 370 Weights................................................... 372
11Engine specifications.............................. 373
Oil specifications..................................... 374 Oil volume............................................... 375 Coolant specification and volume........ 376 Transmission oil specification and volumes....................................................... 376 Brake fluid specification and volume... 376 Power steering specification................ 377 Fuel tank volume specification and volume......................................................... 377 Air conditioning specification and volume......................................................... 377 Battery specifications............................. 378 Symbols general information............... 379 Warning symbols.................................... 379 Indicator symbols.................................... 380 Information symbols............................... 381 Information symbols ceiling console.... 382 Information symbols center console.... 382
12 Index
Index....................................................... 384
12
Contents
9
INTRODUCTION
01 Introduction
On-board owner's manual
· Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov-
Searching for information
01
The owner's manual can be displayed on the
ering commonly used functions.
center console screen and you can carry out
Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor-
searches for the information that you require.
ner for additional information about the on-
To open the owner's manual, press the MY
board owner's manual.
CAR button on the center console, press OK/ MENU and select Owner's manual. For basic information, see "Infotainment operating the system." The following sections also provide more detailed information.
NOTE
· The on-board owner's manual cannot
be accessed while the vehicle is moving.
· Specifications regarding your vehicle
are not found in the on-board informa-
tion. This information is listed in the printed owner's manual.
Searching using the text wheel List of characters
Switching between character entry modes (see the following table) Surf history
The on-board owner's manual start page
There are four ways of finding information articles in the on-board owner's manual:
· Searching: search for an article. · Categories: All of the articles are sorted
by category.
· Favorites: Quick access to frequently
read articles.
Use the text wheel to enter a web address. 1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter keys on the center console can also be used. 2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results of the search will be displayed in the phone book.
}} 11
01 Introduction
||
01
3. To switch from letter entry mode to the
Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. Quick Guide
entry mode for numbers or special char-
Press and hold EXIT to erase all characters.
This is a selection of articles that will help you
acters, or to go view surf history, turn TUNE to one of the selections (see the explanation in the following table) in the list for switching character entry mode (2) and press OK/MENU.
Pressing a number key on the center console while the text wheel is displayed (see the previous illustration) will display a list of characters. Press the desired key repeatedly to enter the desired letter and continue to the
become familiar with some of the vehicle's most common functions. These articles can also be found in their respective categories but are listed here for quick access. Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide
123/A BC =>
Toggle between letters and numbers by pressing OK/MENU. This leads to surf history. Turn TUNE to select a web address and press OK/MENU to go to the website.
next letter, etc. To enter a number, press and hold the button.
Categories The articles in the on-board owner's manual are divided into main categories and sub-categories. The same article may be listed in
and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to return to the previous view. Navigating in an article
Go
Go to the website by pressing
several applicable categories to help make
OK/MENU.
searches easier.
a|A
Toggle between upper and lower
case letters by pressing OK/
MENU.
| | } Switch from the text wheel to the Address: field. Use TUNE to move the cursor and erase characters by pressing EXIT. Press OK/MENU to return to the text wheel. The number/letter keys on the center console can also be used to edit the Address: field.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category structure and press OK/MENU to open a category (indicated by the symbol) or an article (indicated by the symbol). Press EXIT to return to the previous view.
Favorites Articles that have been marked as favorites can be found here. For information about marking an article as a favorite, see "Navigating in an article" below.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the list of favorites and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to return to the previous view.
Home: Returns you to the owner's manual start page. Favorites: Add/remove an article from the list of favorites. This can also be done by pressing the FAV button on the center console keypad. Highlighted link: takes you to the linked article. Important information: if the article contains warnings, cautions or notes, sym-
12
01 Introduction
bols for these types of information and
Owner's information
Contacting Volvo
01
the number of such texts in the article will be displayed here. Turn TUNE to navigate among the links or scroll in an article. When you have scrolled to the beginning/end of an article, you can return to the start page or a favorite by scrolling one additional step up/down. Press OK/ MENU to activate a selection or highlighted link. Press EXIT to return to the previous view.
Your vehicle is equipped with a screen on which you can display information about your vehicle's features and functions. The printed owner's manual supplements the on-board information and contains important texts, the latest updates and instructions that can be useful in situations when it is not practical to read the information on the screen. Changing the language used for the on-board information could mean that some of the
In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552
Related information
· Information on the Internet (p. 20)
information displayed may not comply with national or local statutes and regulations.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and for complying with current statutes and regulations. It is also essential to maintain and service the vehicle according to Volvo's recommendations as stated in the owner's information and the service and warranty booklet. If the on-board information differs from the printed owner's manual, the printed information always takes precedence.
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocars.com/ca
Related information
· About this manual (p. 14) · Important warnings (p. 23)
· Crash event data (p. 18)
· Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)
13
01 Introduction
01 About this manual Reading your owner's manual is a good way to familiarize yourself with the features and systems in your vehicle.
· Before you operate your vehicle for the
first time, we recommend that you look through the information found in the
· Favorites: Quick access to frequently
read articles.
· Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov-
ering commonly used functions.
Select the symbol in the lower right-hand corner for additional information about the onboard owner's manual.
NOTE
The owner's manual mobile app can be downloaded at www.volvocars.com. The mobile app also contains videos and searchable content, and provides easy navigation between the various articles.
chapters "Your Driving Environment" and "During Your Trip."
· Information contained in the balance of
the manual is extremely useful and should be read after operating the vehicle for the first time.
· The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it should be kept in the vehicle for ready access.
NOTE
· The on-board owner's manual cannot
be accessed while the vehicle is moving.
· Specifications regarding your vehicle
are not found in the on-board information. This information is listed in the printed owner's manual.
Footnotes Certain pages of this manual contain information in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page. This information supplements the text that the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if the footnote refers to text in a table).
Display texts There are several displays in the driver's field
On-board owner's manual
The owner's manual in mobile devices
of vision that show messages generated by various systems and functions in the vehicle.
When the printed manual refers to the on-
These texts are indicated in the Owner's
board owner's manual, this pertains to the
Manual by being in slightly larger type than
information displayed on the center console
the surrounding text and are printed in gray,
screen.
(for example: Change doors unlock
The language used on the center console
setting).
screen and instrument panel can be changed in the MY CAR system settings menu.
Decals There are various types of decals in the vehi-
There are four ways of finding information
cle whose purpose is to provide important
articles in the on-board owner's manual:
information in a clear and concise way. The
· Searching: search for an article. · Categories: All of the articles are sorted
importance of these decals is explained as follows, in descending order of importance.
by category.
14
Risk of injury
Risk of damage to the vehicle
01 Introduction
Information
01
G031592 G031593
G031590
Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning background, white text/image on a black background. Decals of this type are used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this type could result in serious injury or death.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a black or blue warning background and space for a message. If the information on decals of this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle could result.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a black background. These decals provide general information.
NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner's Manual are examples only and are not intended to be reproductions of the decals actually used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate location in the vehicle. The applicable information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective decals in the vehicle.
}} 15
01 Introduction
||
01
Types of lists used in the owner's
Bullet lists
information
Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
Procedures Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or
components/functions/points of information that can be listed in random order.
actions that must be carried out in a certain
For example:
order, are arranged in numbered lists in this manual.
If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each
· Coolant · Engine oil
Continues on next page
step in the procedure is numbered in the
} }This symbol can be found at the lower
same way as the corresponding illustra-
right corner to indicate that the current topic
tion.
continues on the following page.
Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases where the order in which the instructions are carried out is not important. Arrows with or without numbers are used to indicate the direction of a movement. Arrows containing letters are used to indicate movement. If there are no illustrations associated with a step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are indicated by ordinary numbers. Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in general overview illustrations in which certain components are pointed out. The corresponding number is also used in the position list's description of the various components.
Continuation from previous page || This symbol can be found at the upper left corner to indicate that the current topic is a continuation from the previous page.
Options and accessories Optional or accessory equipment described in this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be available in all countries or markets. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information.
NOTE
· Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and exhaust emission requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries.
· All information, illustrations and speci-
fications contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all markets.
· Some of the illustrations shown are
generic and may not depict the exact model for which this manual is intended.
· Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.
16
01 Introduction
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident, unseen damage may affect its drivability and safety.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65 Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adaptive steering columns, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Shiftlock When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the selector from this position, the
ignition must be in mode II (p. 79) or the
tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun-
01
engine must be running. Depress the brake
tries.
pedal, press the button on the front side of the gear selector and move the selector from P (Park).
· All information, illustrations and specifica-
tions contained in this manual are based on the latest product information availa-
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal. Another
ble at the time of publication. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in
automatic test may be performed when the
all markets.
vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module. This is normal.
· Some of the illustrations shown are
generic and may not depict the exact model for which this manual is intended.
· Volvo reserves the right to make model
Fuel filler door Press the button on the light switch panel (see the illustration in Refueling opening/
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.
closing fuel filler door (p. 277)) when the vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. It will relock when closed and there will be an audible click. Points to keep in mind
Related information
· Information on the Internet (p. 20) · Volvo and the environment (p. 22) · Important warnings (p. 23)
· Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that coun-
try's applicable safety and exhaust emis-
sion requirements. In some cases it may
be difficult or impossible to comply with
these requirements. Modifications to the
emission control system(s) may render
your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera-
17
01 Introduction
01 Change of ownership
Crash event data
NOTE
When the vehicle changes owners, all personal settings should be reset to the factory defaults.
To reset, press the MY CAR button in the center console followed by OK/MENU and select Settings Reset to factory settings. User data e.g., for apps, the web browser and for personal settings in menus such as the climate system and vehicle settings should be reset to factory defaults. For vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect (VOC), personal
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
settings stored in the vehicle should be
· Whether or not the driver and passenger
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
deleted, see Changing ownership of a vehicle
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
as law enforcement, that have the special
with Volvo On Call. Related information
· Volvo ID (p. 21)
· How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a number of computers whose task is to con-
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
tinuously control and monitor the vehicle's operation. They can also register information during normal driving conditions if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle's operation and
functionality. Some of the stored information
is required by technicians when carrying out
service and maintenance to enable them to
diagnose and rectify any faults that have
occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to
fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements.
This information may be stored in the vehi-
cle's computers for a certain period of time.
18
Volvo will not contribute to spreading the above-mentioned information to third parties without the consent of the vehicle's owner. However, due to national legal requirements and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to provide information of this type to authorities such as law enforcement agencies or others who may assert a legal right to obtain such information. Volvo and service and repair facilities with agreements with Volvo have access to the special technical equipment required in order to read and interpret the information stored by the vehicle's computers. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that the information transmitted to Volvo during service and maintenance is stored and handled in a secure manner and that this handling is done in accordance with applicable legal requirements. For additional information, contact: For additional information, contact: In the United States Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocars.com/ca
Related information
· Information on the Internet (p. 20) · Contacting Volvo (p. 13)
01 Introduction
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
01
Volvo has always been and continues to be a leader in automotive safety.
Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles designed to help protect vehicle occupants in the event of a collision. Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a collision. This energy absorption system including, but not limited to, structural components such as bumper reinforcement bars, bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels must work together to maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle occupants. The supplemental restraint system including but not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, and deployment sensors work together with the above components to provide proper timing for air bag deployment. Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America does not support the use of aftermarket, alternative or anything other than original Volvo parts for collision repair. In addition Volvo does not support the use or re-use of structural components from an existing vehicle that has been previously damaged. Although these parts may appear equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have been previously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has been damaged as a result of a prior collision. The quality of these used
}} 19
01 Introduction
||
01
parts may also have been affected due to
environmental exposure.
Related information
· Important warnings (p. 23) · Information on the Internet (p. 20) · Contacting Volvo (p. 13)
Information on the Internet Additional information regarding your vehicle can be found at www.volvocars.com. Support on the Internet Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code below to visit the site, which is available in most markets.
QR code to the support site The information on the support site is searchable and is grouped into different categories. It includes support for e.g., Internet-based services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC), the navigation system* and apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain various procedures such as how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a cell phone. Downloadable information Maps Sensus Navigation system* maps can be downloaded from the support site. Mobile apps For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos, the owner's manual is available in the form of an app. The VOC* app can also be found here.
Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are available in PDF format. Quick Guides and supplements can also be found on the support site. Select a model and a model year and download the desired information.
Contact Contact information for customer support and the nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site.
Related information
· About this manual (p. 14) · Contacting Volvo (p. 13)
20
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
01 Introduction
Volvo ID
Open Source Software Notice
Portions of this product uses software
01
This is your personal ID that can be used to access a number of services1
The systems in your Volvo contain certain free/open source and other software.
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Creating a Volvo ID To create a Volvo ID, provide your personal email address and then follow the instructions provided in the email that you will receive from Volvo. This can be done from:
· From an Internet-connected vehicle:
Enter your email address in the app that requires a Volvo ID and follow the instructions provides or press the Internet connect ( ) button on the center console and select Apps, Settings and follow the instructions provided.
· Volvo On Call (VOC*): download the latest
version of the VOC app and create a Volvo ID on the start page.
This product uses certain free / open source and other software originating from third parties, that is subject to the GNU General Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project License ("FreeType License") and other different and/or additional copyright licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links how to access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, LGPLv3, and the other open source software licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
This product includes software under following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0.html
· Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
· uBoot (based on v2009.08) · busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http:// www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
· libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
to provide the source code of said free/open
lgpl.html
source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling, upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo retailer.
· Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
The FreeType Project License: http:// www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
· libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
This offer is valid for a period of at least three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.
Related information
· About this manual (p. 14)
1 These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
21
01 Introduction
01 Volvo and the environment
mental refinement of conventional gasoline-
FSC®
Volvo is committed to the well being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment, we care about the environment in
powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.
which we all live. Concern for the environment means an everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
Volvo's environmental activities are based on
environmental impact, you can:
a holistic view, which means we consider the overall environmental impact of a product throughout its complete life cycle. In this context, design, production, product use, and recycling are all important considerations. In production, Volvo has partly or completely phased out several chemicals including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals used in our plants 50% since 1991. Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into production a three-way catalytic converter with a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of this highly efficient system reduces emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately 95 99% and the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to offer CFCfree retrofit kits for the air conditioning system
· Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires.
· Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet.
· Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-
sible.
· See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indicator) light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle has started.
· Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc.
· When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car care products are formulated to be environmentally friendly.
The FSC® (Forest Stewardship Council®) symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in this publication comes from FSC® certified forests and other responsible sources.
Related information
· Economical driving (p. 279) · Tires tire economy (p. 290)
of all models as far back as the 1975
model 240. Advanced electronic engine con-
trols and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer
to our goal. In addition to continuous environ-
22
01 Introduction
Important warnings
WARNING
Volvo service technician before installing
01
Please keep the following warnings in mind when operating/servicing your vehicle.
Driver distraction A driver has a responsibility to do everything possible to ensure his or her own safety and
· Never use a hand-held cellular tele-
phone while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit cellular telephone use by a driver while the vehicle is moving.
· If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-
any accessory in or on your vehicle.
· Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle. Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and
gation system, set and make changes
car's systems.
others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part of that responsibility. Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication systems. These include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You may also own other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. When used properly and safely, they enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, any of these could cause a distraction. For all of these systems, we want to provide the following warning that reflects the strong Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In addition to this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer features that may be found in your vehicle:
to your travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.
· Never program your audio system
while the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use quicker and simpler.
· Never use portable computers or per-
sonal digital assistants while the vehicle is moving.
Accessory installation
· We strongly recommend that Volvo own-
ers install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified
· Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.
· Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of nongenuine accessories.
Related information
· About this manual (p. 14) · Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)
23
01 Introduction
01 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance
Technician certification
Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance.
Additional information, features, and benefits of this program are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certified technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.
NOTE
Some vehicles may be equipped with Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect, which will allow access to the call center and additional features directly from the vehicle. This is in addition to the Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance program mentioned above. Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will be a customer pay subscription offer after an initial complimentary trial period.
Related information
· Information on the Internet (p. 20)
24
SAFETY
02 Safety
Occupant safety
· Never drink and drive.
Recall information
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.
Volvo's concern for safety
02
Our concern for safety dates back to 1927
when the first Volvo rolled off the production
line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo inven-
tion), safety cages, and energy-absorbing
impact zones were designed into Volvo vehi-
cles long before it was fashionable or
required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our
· If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects on your driving abilities.
· Take a driver-retraining course. · Have your eyes checked regularly. · Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
· Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
· Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with regard to stopping distance.
Information regarding recalls or other service campaigns is available on our website at www.volvocars.com/us/.
On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO and the heading RECALL INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower left side of the screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Number for your vehicle (found at the base of the windshield). If your vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be displayed on this page. Volvo customers in Canada For any questions regarding open recalls for
vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever have a safety concern with your
· Never send text messages while driving. · Refrain from using or minimize the use of
a cell phone while driving.
your vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to answer your questions, please contact Volvo Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon-
vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255.
Related information
· Recall information (p. 26) · Reporting safety defects (p. 27)
day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or by e-mail at vclcust@volvocars.com. You may also write us at:
Occupant safety reminders
Volvo Cars of Canada
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old you are but rather on:
· How well you see. · Your ability to concentrate.
National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
· How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
Related information
· Occupant safety (p. 26)
The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic
· Reporting safety defects (p. 27)
environment.
26
02 Safety
Reporting safety defects
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
Reporting safety defects in Canada
The following information will help you report any perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans-
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov, where you can also enter your vehicle's VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) to see if it has any open recalls.
port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. Transport Canada can be contacted at: 1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
02
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
Volvo strongly recommends that if
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
to notifying Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives
your vehicle is covered under a service campaign, safety or emis-
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1
similar complaints, it may open an
sion recall or similar action, it should Related information
investigation, and if it finds that a
be completed as soon as possible.
· Occupant safety (p. 26)
safety defect exists in a group of
Please check with your local retailer
· Recall information (p. 26)
vehicles, it may order a recall and
or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA if your vehicle is covered under
cannot become involved in individ-
these conditions.
ual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
NHTSA can be reached at: Internet: http://www.nhtsa.gov
Hotline toll-free at
Telephone:
1-888-327-4236
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
27
02 Safety
Seat belts general
peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the
Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-
occupant.
pants of your vehicle. Children should be
properly restrained, using an infant, car, or
02
booster seat determined by age, weight and
height.
Seat belt maintenance Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
function as follows: attach the seat belt and
front seat of a vehicle.
pull rapidly on the strap.
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arm, behind the back or otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their strength when exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they appear to be undamaged.
WARNING
· Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
· Any device used to induce slack into
the shoulder belt portion of the threepoint belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision.
· The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be taut in order to function properly.
· Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened.
Adjusting the seat belt Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Seat belt pretensioners All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which, in the event of a collision, limits the
Related information
· Seat belts buckling/unbuckling (p. 29) · Seat belt reminder (p. 30) · Seat belts pregnancy (p. 30)
28
02 Safety
Seat belts buckling/unbuckling Seat belts should be used by all occupants in the vehicle when it is in motion.
NOTE
Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,
Related information
· Seat belt reminder (p. 30) · Seat belts pregnancy (p. 30)
Buckling a seat belt Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
which is designed to help keep the seat belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible. If this is
02
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click
done, a sound from the seat belt retractor
is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
will be audible, which is normal, and the
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provi-
seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in
ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.
Seat belt retractor
The seat belt retractor will lock up in the following situations:
See also Child restraints (p. 47) for information about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR func-
· if the belt is pulled out rapidly
tion to anchor a child seat.
· during braking and acceleration · if the vehicle is leaning excessively
When wearing the seat belt remember:
· The belt should not be twisted or turned.
· when driving in turns
· The lap section of the belt must be posi-
· if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is
tioned low on the hips (not pressing against the abdomen).
activated
· Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.
Unbuckling the seat belt To remove the seat belt, press the red section on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt back into the retractor slot.
29
02 Safety
Seat belt reminder
Rear seats
Seat belts pregnancy
The seat belt reminder is intended to alert all occupants of the vehicle that their seat belts
The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions:
The seat belt should always be worn during pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be
should be fastened before the vehicle begins
02
to move.
· It provides information about which seat
belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-
worn correctly.
sage will appear in the information display
when a belt is being used. This message
will disappear after several seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button
on the left steering wheel lever.
· It also provides a reminder if one of the
occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in
motion. A visual and audible signal will be given. These signals will stop when the
G017726 G020998
seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the OK button.
Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console The seat belt reminder consists of an audible signal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat belts (p. 28). The audible signal and indicator light will be on for several seconds from the time the ignition is switched on, regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened.
· The message Unbelted in rear seat will
appear in the information display if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message in the information display can always be accessed, even if it has been erased, by pressing the OK button to display stored messages.
Related information
· Seat belts pregnancy (p. 30)
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of
If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warning light will be active for a several seconds.
the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large
30
02 Safety
a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel. Related information
· Seat belts buckling/unbuckling (p. 29) · Seat belt reminder (p. 30) · Child restraints (p. 47)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) bags (p. 39), a front passenger occupant
As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts (p. 28), your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
weight sensor (p. 36), and inflatable cur-
tains (p. 41). All of these systems are moni-
tored by the SRS control module. An SRS
warning light in the instrument panel (see the
02
illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in
modes I or II, and will normally go out after
approximately 6 seconds if no faults are
detected in the system.
Where applicable, a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed.
Models with an analog instrument panel
See also Information displays indicator symbols (p. 72) and Information displays warning symbols (p. 74) for more information about indicator and warning lights.
Models with an digital instrument panel* Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags (p. 32), side impact air-
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
31
02 Safety
||
WARNING
· If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illumi-
02
nates while you are driving, have the vehicle inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible.
· Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-
ence in the system could cause mal-
function and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
WARNING
If your vehicle has become flood-damaged in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle), do not attempt to start the vehicle or insert the remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery (see below). This may cause airbag deployment which could result in serious injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs. Before attempting to tow the vehicle: 1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery. 2. Follow the instructions for manually overriding the shiftlock system Transmission shiftlock override (p. 255).
Related information
· Crash mode general information
(p. 44)
Front airbags The front airbags supplement the three-point seat belts (p. 28). For these airbags to provide the protection intended, seat belts must be worn at all times.
The front airbag system The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators, causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas.
G018665
32
02 Safety
Location of the passenger's side front airbag As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
WARNING
· The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT tonot a replacement forthe three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident.
· Never drive with your hands on the
steering wheel pad/airbag housing.
· The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment and depending on variables such as seating position, one may experience abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other injuries as a result from deployment of
collisions where rapid deceleration occurs.
· The SRS (p. 31) sensors, which trigger
the front airbags, are designed to react to
both the impact of the collision and the
02
inertial forces generated by it, and to
determine if the intensity of the collision is
sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners
and/or airbags to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the front airbags.
· If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object at a low speed, the front airbags will not necessarily deploy.
· Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the rear or in a rollover situation.
process, including inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second.
one or both of the airbags.
· When installing any accessory equip-
ment, make sure that the front airbag
· The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags should have deployed or not.
The location of the front airbags is indicated
system is not damaged. Any interfer-
by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering
ence in the system could cause mal-
WARNING
wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash. The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub. The passenger's side front airbag is folded
function. Front airbag deployment
· The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle,
If any of the airbags have deployed:
· Do not attempt to drive the vehicle.
Have it towed to a qualified repair facility.
· If necessary seek medical attentIon.
behind a panel located above the glove com-
speed and object impacted. The airbags
partment.
may also deploy in certain non-frontal
}} 33
02 Safety
||
WARNING
· Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
02
front passenger's seat. We also recommend that occupants under 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt fastened1.
· Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.
· The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of pro-
longed exposure.
www.volvocars.com/us In Canada Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocars.com/ca
Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support: In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552
1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information, (p. 36).
34
NOTE
· Deployment of front airbags occurs
only one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small amount of powder is released. The release of the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. This is a normal characteristic and does not indicate fire.
· Volvo's front airbags use special sen-
sors that are integrated with the front seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision.
· Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity.
Airbag decals Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors Passenger's side airbag decal
02 Safety
WARNING
· Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.
· Occupants in the front passenger's
seat must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit leaning toward the instrument panel or otherwise sit out of position.
· The occupant's back must be as
upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened.
· Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.
WARNING
· No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove
02
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment.
· There should be no loose articles,
such as coffee cups on the floor, seat,
or dashboard area.
· Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
· Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occu-
pants.
Related information
· Occupant Weight Sensor (p. 36) · Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
(p. 39)
· Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41) · Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
(p. 31)
35
02 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
detect the presence of a properly seated
NOTE
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
occupant and determine if the passenger's
designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate).
02
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a selfdiagnostic test.
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
senger's side front airbag when:
under certain conditions.
· the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
2
or has small/medium objects in the front seat,
· the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,
· the system determines that a small child
· The OWS indicator light will stay on · The SRS warning light (p. 31) will come
on and stay on
· The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service
urgent will be displayed in the information display.
is present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the
WARNING
2
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light Disabling the passenger's side front airbag Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
G017724
manufacturer's instructions,
· the system determines that a small child
is present in a booster seat,
· a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,
· a child or a small person occupies the
front passenger's seat.
If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay
of any vehicle with a front passenger side air-
on to remind you that the passenger's side
bag (p. 32), and be properly restrained for
front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER
their size and weight. For child safety recom-
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the
mendations, see Child safety (p. 45).
overhead console, near the base of the rear-
The OWS works with sensors that are part of
view mirror.
the front passenger's seat and seat
belt (p. 28). The sensors are designed to
36
02 Safety
WARNING
· Never try to open, remove, or repair
any components in the OWS system. This could result in system malfunction. Maintenance or repairs should only be carried out by an a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could reduce pressure on the seat cushion, which might interfere with the OWS system's function.
Passenger's seat occupancy status
OWS indicator light status
Passenger's side front airbag status
Seat unoccupied
OWS indicator light lights up.
Passenger's side front airbag disabled
Seat occupied by low weight occupant/ objectA
OWS indicator light lights up
Passenger's side front airbag disabled
Seat occupied by heavy occupant/object
OWS indicator light is not lit
Passenger's side front airbag enabled
A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the passenger's side front airbag in the event of a collision anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
· Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.
· Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
· Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.
· If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor lamp remains on even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. This condition reflects limitations of the OWS classification capability. It does not indicate OWS malfunction.
Modifications If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability, for example by altering or adapting the driver's or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
02
}} 37
02 Safety
|| 1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
02
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
WARNING
· No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the front passenger's seat. If a child is seated in the front passenger's seat with any additional weight, this extra weight could cause the OWS system to enable the airbag, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.
· The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.
· The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.
WARNING
· Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow these instructions could adversely affect the system's function and result in serious injury to the occupant of the front passenger's seat:
· The full weight of the front seat pas-
senger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift him/herself off the seat cushion using the armrest in the door or the center console, by pressing the feet on the floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat cushion, or by pressing against the backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause OWS to disable the front, passenger's side airbag.
38
02 Safety
WARNING · Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (Child restraints (p. 47)).
· No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.
Related information
· Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
(p. 31)
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your vehicle, it is
also equipped with Side Impact Protection
System (SIPS) airbags.
02
Driver's side SIPS airbag
G032949
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only) The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.
Passenger's side SIPS airbag
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.
}} 39
02 Safety
||
Components in the SIPS airbag system
This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas
generator, the side airbag modules built into
the outboard sides of both front seat back-
02
rests, and electronic sensors/wiring.
WARNING
· The SIPS airbag system is a supple-
ment to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.
· The use of seat covers on the front
seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
· No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment.
· Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.
· Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.
Related information
· Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
(p. 31)
· Front airbags (p. 32) · Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41)
40
02 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
NOTE
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is designed to help protect the heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions.
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds.
WARNING
In order for the IC to provide its best pro-
tection, both front seat occupants and
both outboard rear seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt
02
properly fastened; adults using the seat
· The IC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the rear of the vehicle or in
belt and children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats. Children must never be allowed in the front passenger seat, Child safety (p. 45) for guidelines. Failure to
rollover situations.
follow these instructions can result in injury
· Never try to open or repair any compo-
to the vehicle occupants in an accident.
nents of the IC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Related information
Volvo service technician.
· Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
· Never hang heavy items from the ceil-
(p. 31)
This system consists of inflatable curtains located along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from the center of both front side windows to the rear edge of the rear side door windows.
ing handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain.
· The cargo area and rear seat should
not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain.
· Front airbags (p. 32) · Child safety (p. 45)
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable
Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag Sys-
tem (p. 39) (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.
41
02 Safety
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
The WHIPS system consists of specially
designed hinges and brackets on the front
seat backrests designed to help absorb some
02
of the energy generated in a collision from the
rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended).
rearward. This movement helps absorb some of the forces that could result in whiplash.
WARNING · The WHIPS system is designed to
supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident.
· The WHIPS system is designed to
function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed.
In the event of a rear-end collision, the hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly to allow the backrest/head restraint to help support the occupant's head before moving slightly 42
WARNING
· Occupants in the front seats must
never sit out of position. The occupant's back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened.
· If your vehicle has been involved in a
rear-end collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician, even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced.
· Do not attempt to service any compo-
nent in the WHIPS system yourself.
02 Safety
WARNING · Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
Related information
· Seat belts general (p. 28)
the front seats could impede the func-
tion of the WHIPS system.
· If the rear seat backrests are folded
02
down, cargo must be secured to pre-
vent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could
interfere with the action of the WHIPS
system.
WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rearfacing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded down, the occupied front seats must be adjusted forward so that they do not touch the folded rear seat.
43
02 Safety
Crash mode general information After a collision, the functionality of some of the vehicle's systems may be reduced as a safety precaution.
02
Warning symbol: analog instrument panel
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the information display.
NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.
Crash mode is a feature that is triggered if one or more of the safety systems (e.g. front (p. 32) or side airbags (p. 39), an inflatable curtain (p. 41), or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The collision may have damaged an important function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc.
WARNING · Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical system after the vehicle has displayed Safety mode See manual. This could result in injury or improper system function.
· Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-
ing status should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· After Safety mode See manual has
been displayed, if you detect the odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.
Related information
· Crash mode starting the vehicle
(p. 45)
· Crash mode moving the vehicle
(p. 45)
Warning symbol: digital instrument panel*
44
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Safety
Crash mode starting the vehicle If Crash mode has been set Crash mode (p. 44)) and damage to the vehicle is minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the engine. To do so: 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition
slot and open the driver's door. If a message is displayed that the ignition is on, press the start button. 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the remote key in the ignition slot. 3. Try to start the vehicle.
WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual
is still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven and must be towed. Concealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to control.
Related information
· Crash mode general information (p. 44) · Crash mode moving the vehicle
(p. 45)
Crash mode moving the vehicle If the message Normal mode appears after an attempt has been made to start the engine, Starting the vehicle after a crash (p. 45), the vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. It should, however, not be moved farther than is absolutely necessary.
WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Crash mode has been set, it should not be driven or towed (pulled by another vehicle). There may be concealed damage that could make it difficult or impossible to control. The vehicle should be transported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs.
Related information
· Crash mode general information (p. 44)
Child safety Children should always be seated safely when traveling in the vehicle.
General information Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint systems (p. 47) for all occupants including children. Remember that, regardless of age and size, a child should always be properly restrained in a vehicle. Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ LATCH attachments (p. 54), which make it more convenient to install child seats. Some restraint systems for children are designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child restraint systems can help protect children in vehicles in the event of an accident only if they are used properly. However, children could be endangered in a crash if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions for your child restraint can result in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, a child held in a person's arms can be crushed between the vehicle's interior and an unrestrained person. The child could also be injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. The same can also hap-
02
}} 45
02 Safety
||
pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on
When a child has outgrown the child safety
the seat. Other occupants should also be
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
properly restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect the child here is to place the
02
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your state or province. Recent accident statistics have shown that children are safer in rear seating positions than front seating positions when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help protect a child
child on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly located on the hips (see Booster cushions (p. 53) for illustration). Legislation in your state or province may mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in combination with the seat belt, depending on the child's age and/or size. Please check local regulations.
in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when
A specially designed and tested booster
selecting a child restraint system: It should have a label certifying that it meets
cushion and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo retailer.
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
USA: for children weighing 33 80 lbs. (15
Standards (FMVSS 213) or in Canada, CMVSS 213.
36 kg) and 38 54 inches (97 137 cm) in height
Make sure the child restraint system is approved for the child's height, weight and development the label required by the standard or regulation, or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this information.
Canada: for children weighing 40 80 lbs. (18 36 kg) and 40 54 inches (102 137 cm) in height
In using any child restraint system, we urge you to carefully look over the instructions that are provided with the restraint. Be sure you understand them and can use the device properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint system can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle.
WARNING · Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened.
· On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.
Child seat should always be registered. See Child restraints (p. 47) for more information.
Volvo's recommendations Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. A front airbag (p. 32) is a very powerful device designed, by law, to help protect an adult. Because of the size of the airbag and its speed of inflation, a child should never be placed in the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up.
46
02 Safety
Volvo has some very specific
Child restraints
recommendations:
· Always wear your seat belt (p. 28).
Suitable child restraints should always be used when children travel in the vehicle.
· Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-
Child restraint systems
02
point seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not dis-
connect the airbag system in your vehi-
cle.
G022840 G022847
· Volvo strongly recommends that every-
one in the vehicle be properly restrained.
· Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
Convertible seat
WARNING
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag.
· Drive safely!
Related information
· Infant seats (p. 49) · Convertible seats (p. 51) · Booster cushions (p. 53) · Integrated booster cushion general
information (p. 57)
· Child safety locks (p. 61) · Top tether anchors (p. 56)
Infant seat There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats (p. 49), convertible seats (p. 51), and booster cushions (p. 53). They are classified according to the child's age and size. The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a three-point seat belt (p. 28). Refer to ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors (p. 54) and Top tether anchors (p. 56) for information on securing
A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.
a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
}} 47
02 Safety
||
02
Booster cushion
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information on securing the restraint.
G023269
WARNING · When not in use, keep the child
restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
· A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ ELR) To make child seat installation easier, each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child seat: 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible at this time and is normal. The belt will now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened.
Child restraint registration and recalls Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://wwwodi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/ register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
48
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ menu.htm. Related information
· Child safety locks (p. 61) · Integrated booster cushion general
information (p. 57)
Infant seats Suitable child restraints should always be used when children (depending on their age/ size) are seated in the vehicle.
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
02 Safety
02
G022844 G023270
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to (p. 54) and (p. 56) for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
WARNING · An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
· The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation.
}} 49
02 Safety
|| WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
02
front passenger airbag not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause
the airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri-
ous injury or death to a child seated in this
position.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.
G023271 G022846
G022850
Fasten the seat belt
Ensure that the seat is securely in place 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the
seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt.
50
02 Safety
WARNING
Convertible seats
It should not be possible to move the child restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt path.
Suitable child restraints should always be used when children (depending on their age/ size) are seated in the vehicle. Securing a convertible seat with a seat
02
The infant seat can be removed by unbuck-
belt
ling the seat belt and letting it retract com-
pletely.
G018630 G022847
Related information
· Child safety (p. 45) · Child restraints (p. 47) · Convertible seats (p. 51) · Integrated booster cushion general
information (p. 57)
· ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 54) · Top tether anchors (p. 56)
Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.
Refer to (p. 54) and (p. 56) for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.
}} 51
02 Safety
||
WARNING
· A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its
02
neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that chil-
dren should ride rearward facing, prop-
erly restrained, as long as possible.
· Convertible child seats should be instal-
led in the rear seat only.
· A rear-facing convertible seat should
not be positioned behind the driver's
seat unless there is adequate space for
safe installation.
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Fasten the seat belt 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.
G022848 G022849
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along
the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt.
52
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt path.
The convertible seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Related information
· Child safety (p. 45) · Child restraints (p. 47) · Infant seats (p. 49) · Integrated booster cushion general
information (p. 57)
· ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 54) · Top tether anchors (p. 56)
02 Safety
Booster cushions Booster cushions should be properly positioned in the vehicle.
Securing a booster cushion
02
G022850 G022851
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats (p. 51). 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle. 2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions.
}} 53
02 Safety
||
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.
Related information
· Child safety (p. 45) · Child restraints (p. 47)
02
· Infant seats (p. 49) · Convertible seats (p. 51)
· ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 54)
· Top tether anchors (p. 56)
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped child seats are located in the rear, outboard seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child seat anchors
G022852
Positioning the seat belt 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut
and fits snugly around the child. WARNING
· The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach.
· The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder.
· The shoulder belt must never be
placed behind the child's back or under the arm.
54
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors and top tethers (p. 56) whenever possible.
02 Safety
To access the anchors 1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.
NOTE · The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors. When installing a child restraint in this position, attach the
WARNING
· Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-
rectly to the anchor (see the illustra-
tion). If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not
02
3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.
restraint's top tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the top tether anchorage point and secure the restraint with the vehicle's center seat belt.
· Always follow your child seat manufac-
turer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
be properly secured in the event of a collision.
· The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
restraint anchors are only intended for use with child seats positioned in the outboard seating positions. These anchors are not certified for use with
and top tethers whenever possible.
any child restraint that is positioned in
WARNING
the center seating position. When securing a child restraint in the center
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings.
seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt. Related information
· Child safety (p. 45)
· Infant seats (p. 49)
· Convertible seats (p. 51)
· Integrated booster cushion general
information (p. 57)
G018631
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors
55
02 Safety
Top tether anchors
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are
instructions for information on securing the child seat.
located on the rear side of the backrests. 02
Child restraint anchorages
NOTE
On models equipped with the optional
cargo area cover, this cover should be
removed before a child seat is attached to
the child restraint anchors.
Securing a child seat 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and attach it to the anchor.
3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is not equipped with lower tether straps, or the restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for securing a child restraint using the Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt (see Child restraints (p. 47)).
4. Firmly tension all straps.
WARNING
· Always refer to the recommendations
made by the child restraint manufacturer.
· Volvo recommends that the top tether
anchors be used when installing a forward-facing child restraint.
· Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head restraint.
· Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a collision occur.
· Do not install rear speakers that
require the removal of the top tether anchors or interfere with the proper use of the top tether strap.
56
Related information
· Child safety (p. 45) · Infant seats (p. 49) · Convertible seats (p. 51) · Integrated booster cushion general
information (p. 57)
· ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 54)
02 Safety
Integrated booster cushion general
In Canada, Transport Canada's
information
weight recommendation is 40
The booster cushions are designed to raise the child higher so that the shoulder strap crosses over the child's collarbone, not over the neck.
80 lbs (18 36 kg).
If using a booster cushion does not result in
02
proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then
the child should be placed in a properly
Integrated two-stage booster cushion2
secured child restraint (see (p. 47) ). The
Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions
shoulder belt must never be placed behind
are located in the outboard seating positions.
the child's back or under the arm.
These booster cushions have been specially
designed to help safeguard children in the
rear seat. They should be stowed (p. 60)
(folded down into the seat cushion) when not
in use. When using an integrated booster
cushion (p. 59), the child must be secured
with the vehicle's three-point seat belt.
Use these booster cushions only with children whose weight is between:
G017875
· Stage 1: 48 80 lbs (22 36 kg) · Stage 2: 33 55 lbs (15 25 kg)
and whose height is between:
Correct seating position: child's head is below the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across the collarbone
· Stage 1: 45 55 in. (115 140 cm)
· Stage 2: 37 47 in. (95 120 cm)
2 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.
}}
57
02 Safety
|| 02
· That the seat belt (p. 28) is properly posi-
tioned and is taut.
· The shoulder section of the seat belt is
across the child's collarbone, not over the neck.
· The lap section of the seat belt is across
the child's hips and not the abdomen.
WARNING DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual.
Incorrect seating position: the child's head is above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is not across the collarbone
Before driving, check that:
· The integrated two-stage booster cushion
is set in the correct position according to the child's height and weight (see the table below) and is locked in position.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Weight
48 80 lbs 22 36 kg
33 55 lbs 15 25 kg
Height 45 55 in.
37 47 in.
G017719
MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED.
· Use this booster cushion only with
children whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table (Integrated booster cushion general information (p. 57)).
· In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
115 140 cm 95 120 cm
Related information
· Child safety (p. 45) · Infant seats (p. 49) · Convertible seats (p. 51) · Booster cushions (p. 53)
58
Integrated booster cushion using The Integrated booster cushion (p. 57) in the rear seat can be folded up in two stages, depending on the child's height and weight.
Stage 1
Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it in position. Stage 2
G017697 G017784
Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2) to release the booster cushion.
With the booster cushion in the stage 1 position, press the button (see the arrow in illustration 1).
02 Safety
Lift the front edge of the booster cushion and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it in position.
WARNING
02
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur
Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual.
MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED.
· Use this booster cushion only with
children whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table (Integrated booster cushion general information (p. 57)).
· In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
}} 59
02 Safety
|| Related information
· Integrated booster cushion stowing
(p. 60)
02
Integrated booster cushion stowing The integrated booster cushion (p. 57) can be folded down completely (stowed) from either the stage 1 or stage 2 positions.
NOTE
The booster cushion cannot be moved from the stage 2 (upper) position to the stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be folded down completely to the stowed position, and then adjusted to stage 1.
Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion. Press down on the center of the booster cushion to return it to the stowed position.
NOTE
The booster cushion must be in the stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down.
CAUTION
Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed.
60
02 Safety
WARNING DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. · Use this booster cushion only with
children whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table (Integrated booster cushion general information (p. 57)).
· In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
Related information
· Integrated booster cushion using (p. 59)
Child safety locks
Power child safety locks and
Power child safety locks* help prevent chil-
disengaging rear door windows*
dren from inadvertently opening one of the
rear doors or windows from inside the vehicle.
02 Manual child safety locks
Child safety locks rear doors The controls are located on the rear door jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a screwdriver to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position. The rear doors can be opened from the inside when the slot is in the vertical position.
G021077
Driver's door control panel The power child safety locks can be activated/deactivated when the remote key is in mode I (p. 79) or higher. Activation/deactivation can be done up to 2 minutes after the engine has been switched off (if no door has been opened). To activate the child safety locks: 1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher, or
start the engine. 2. Press the button on the driver's door con-
trol panel (see the illustration). > Rear child locks Activated will be
displayed in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is activated. When the child safety locks are activated:
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
02 Safety
||
· The rear door windows can only be
opened from the driver's door control panel
· The rear doors cannot be opened from
02
the inside
The child safety locks' current setting is stored when the engine is switched off. If these locks were activated when the engine was switched off, they will also be active when the engine is restarted.
Related information
· Detachable key blade general informa-
tion (p. 157)
· Locking/unlocking from inside (p. 166)
62
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
03 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview This overview shows the location of the instrument panel and center console displays, and controls/buttons/switches.
03
64
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 65
03 Instruments and controls
|| 03
66
Function
See
Controls for menus and messages, turn signals, high/low beams, trip computer Paddles for manually shifting gears* Cruise control
(p. 76), (p. 95), (p. 89), (p. 115) (p. 253)
(p. 181)
Horn, airbag
Main instrument panel Infotainment system/ Bluetooth hands-free controls START/STOP ENGINE button Ignition slot
(p. 87), (p. 32) (p. 68)
Sensus Infotainment supplement (p. 78)
(p. 78)
Display for infotainment system functions and menus
(p. 112), Sensus Infotainment supplement
Hazard warning flash- (p. 94) ers
Door handle
03 Instruments and controls
Function
See
Function
See
In-door control pan- (p. 100),
Power seat* adjust- (p. 81)
els (power windows, (p. 102),
ment controls
mirrors, central locking button, power child safety locks)
(p. 166), (p. 61)
Lighting panel, but- (p. 89), tons for opening fuel (p. 277), filler door and unlock- (p. 168)
Controls for the info- (p. 76),
ing the tailgate
tainment system and Sensus Info-
03
menus Climate system controls
tainment supplement (p. 128)
Related information
· Information displays ambient tempera-
ture sensor (p. 77)
· Information displays trip odometer and
clock (p. 78)
Gear selector
(p. 251)
Controls for active chassis (Four-C)* Wipers and washers
Steering wheel adjustment Parking brake
(p. 175) (p. 98), (p. 99) (p. 87) (p. 268)
Hood opening control (p. 327)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
03 Instruments and controls
Information displays introduction The displays show information on some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise control, the trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and symbols.
More detailed information can be found in the descriptions of the functions that use the information displays.
Gauges and indicators: analog instrument panel
Tachometer: Shows engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm) Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear
Gauges and indicators: digital
instrument panel*
Different themes (display alternatives) can be
03
selected for the digital instrument panel:
· Elegance
· Eco
· Performance
To change themes, press the OK button on the left steering wheel lever and use the thumb wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OK to confirm your choice.
Information displays: analog instrument panel
Fuel gauge: When the indicator shows one white marking1, a yellow indicator light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also Trip computer introduction (p. 115) and Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275) for additional information.
Eco meter: Indicates how economically the vehicle is being driven. The higher the needle moves on the scale, the more economically the vehicle is being driven.
Speedometer
Information displays: digital instrument panel* 1 When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red
68
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
03
Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows one white marking, a yellow indicator light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also Trip computer introduction (p. 115) and Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275) for additional information. Coolant temperature gauge
Speedometer
Tachometer (engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear
Theme Eco: gauges and indicators Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a white marking, a yellow indicator light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also Trip computer introduction (p. 115) and Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275) for additional information. Eco Guide (see Eco Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 71)) Speedometer
Tachometer (engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear
Theme Performance: gauges and indicators Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a white marking, a yellow indicator light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also Trip computer introduction (p. 115) and Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275) for additional information. Coolant temperature gauge
Speedometer
Tachometer (shows engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Power Meter (see Eco Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 71)). Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
03 Instruments and controls
|| Indicator and warning symbols
03
Some of the symbols shown may not be available in all markets or models.
Related information
· Instrument overview (p. 64) · Information displays indicator symbols
(p. 72)
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
Indicator and warning symbols: analog instrument panel
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument panel
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
Function check All indicator and warning symbols light up in ignition mode II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged. If the engine does not start or if the function check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the malfunction indicator light, which may indicate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system, and the symbol for low oil pressure.
70
03 Instruments and controls
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*
Average
Eco guide and Power guide are two gauges in the instrument panel that help improve driving economy. The vehicle also stores driving-related statistics in the form of a bar graph, see Trip computer Trip statistics (p. 122).
The average reading changes gradually according to changes in the current reading to indicate how economically the vehicle has been driven recently. The higher the average reading, the more economically the vehicle has been driven.
Introduction
Power Meter
This gauge indicates the engine power that
03
To display or remove these functions from the
has been utilized and the amount of power
instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see
remaining.
Information displays introduction (p. 68)). Driving statistics are also stored and can be
Current (instantaneous) reading
displayed in the form of a bar chart (see Trip
Average
computer Trip statistics (p. 122)).
Current (instantaneous) reading
Eco Guide
This is the current level of economical driving;
This gauge gives an indication of how eco-
the higher the reading, the more economically
nomically the vehicle is being driven.
the vehicle is being driven.
This value is calculated based on the vehicle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load and brake use.
The optimal speed range is between approximately 3050 mph (5080 km/h), preferably at as low rpm as possible. The markers fall when the brake or accelerator pedal is pressed.
Available power Utilized power
If the current reading is very low, the red field in the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay, indicating low driving economy.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
03 Instruments and controls
||
Available power The smaller, upper indicator shows the
Information displays indicator symbols
engine's available power2. The higher the reading on the scale, the greater the amount of power remaining in the current gear.
The indicator symbols alert the driver when certain functions are activated, that a system is actively working or that a fault may have
Utilized power
occurred in a system or function.
The larger, lower indicator shows the amount of engine power that has been utilized2. The
Symbol Description
03
higher the reading on the scale, the greater
the amount of power that is being utilized.
Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)*system
The larger the gap between the two indicators, the greater the amount of power remain-
Malfunction indicator light
ing.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Rear fog lights on
Stability system
The stability system's Sport mode is activated Low fuel level
Information symbol, read the text displayed in the instrument panel High beam indicator
Symbol Description Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator
Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS)A The Eco function is on.
TheStart/Stop function is active (the engine has auto-stopped)
A Option in Canada
Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL) system This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in the ABL system. See Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 92) for more information about this system.
2 Depending on rpm
72
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Malfunction Indicator Light As you drive, a computer called On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's engine, transmission, electrical and emission systems.
The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if the computer senses a condition that potentially may need correcting. When this happens, please have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
A malfunction indicator light may have many causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a change in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt fuel economy, emission controls, and drivability. Extended driving without correcting the cause could even damage other components in your vehicle.
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine was running while the vehicle was refueled. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) If the warning light comes on, there may be a malfunction in the ABS system (the standard braking system will still function). Check the system by:
1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off the ignition.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the warning light goes off, no further action is required.
If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection, see Brakes general (p. 265) for additional information.
Rear fog lights This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights are on.
Stability system This indicator symbol flashes when the stability system is actively working to stabilize the vehicle, see Stability system introduction (p. 175) for more detailed information.
Stability system - Sport mode This symbol illuminates to indicate that the stability system's Sport mode has been activated to help provide maximum tractive force, for example when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand.
Low fuel level When this light comes on, the vehicle should be refueled as soon as possible. See Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275) for information about fuel and refueling.
Information symbol The information symbol lights up and a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. The message can be erased and the symbol can be turned off by
pressing the OK button (see Information display menu controls (p. 112) for information) or this will take place automatically after a short time (the length of time varies, depending on the function affected). The information symbol may also illuminate together with other symbols. High beam indicator This symbol illuminates when the high beam headlights are on, or if the high beam flash function is used. Left turn signal indicator Right turn signal indicator
NOTE · Both turn signal indicators will flash
when the hazard warning flashers are used.
· If either of these indicators flash faster
than normal, the direction indicators are not functioning properly.
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire pressure in one or more tires is low, see Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) general information (p. 306) for detailed information. Eco* function on The symbol will illuminate when the Eco function is activated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03
}} 73
03 Instruments and controls
||
Start/stop* The symbol illuminates when the engine has
Information displays warning symbols
auto-stopped.
The warning lights alert the driver that an
Related information
· Information displays introduction (p. 68)
important function is activated or that a serious fault has occurred.
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
Symbol Description
03
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake appliedB
sary. If the oil level is normal and the light stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Parking brake applied This symbol flashes while the brake is being applied and then glows steadily when the parking brake has been set.
See Parking brake general information (p. 268) for more information about using the parking brake.
SRS airbags
Seat belt reminder
Generator not charging
Fault in the brake system
Warning symbol, read the text displayed in the instrument panel
A Certain engines do not use this symbol to indicate low oil pressure. On these models, a text message will be displayed on the instrument panel instead, see Engine compartment engine oil (p. 329).
B The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital instrument panel.
Low oil pressure If the light comes on while driving, stop the vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil level. Add oil if neces-
Airbags SRS If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, or remains on for longer than approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
See Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (p. 31) for more information about the airbag system.
Seat belt reminder This symbol comes on for approximately 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or her seat belt.
74
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Generator not charging This symbol comes on during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Engine temperature Engine overheating can result from low oil or
If the
and
symbols come on
at the same time, there may be a fault in the
brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.
WARNING · If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a warning message is displayed in the text window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high
2. Restart the engine.
service technician and have the brake
heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. Engine overheating will be signaled with text and a red warning triangle in the middle of the instrument display. The exact text will depend on the degree of overheating. It may range from High engine temp Reduce speed to High engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate, other messages, such as Coolant level low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If your engine does overheat so that you must stop the engine, always allow the engine to cool before attempting to check oil and coolant levels.
· If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-
ing.
· If the symbols remain on, check the level
in the brake fluid reservoir, see Engine compartment brake fluid (p. 332). If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, with great care, to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
· If the level in the reservoir is below MIN,
the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the
system inspected.
· If the
and
symbols
are on at the same time, there is a risk
of reduced vehicle stability.
Warning symbol The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the instrument panel. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button, see Infor-
03
See Engine compartment coolant (p. 331)
brake system checked.
mation display menu controls (p. 112). The
for more information.
warning symbol can also come on in conjunc-
Fault in brake system
tion with other symbols.
If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may
Action:
be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see Engine compartment brake fluid (p. 332). If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehicle further.
2. Read the information on the display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using OK.
}} 75
03 Instruments and controls
||
Reminder doors not closed
Related information
My Car introduction
If one of the doors is not closed properly, the
· Information displays introduction (p. 68)
The MY CAR menu system provides access
information or warning symbol illuminates
· Information displays indicator symbols
to menus for operating many of the vehicle's
(depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic
(p. 72)
functions, such as setting the clock, door mir-
will be displayed in instrument panel and an
rors, lock and alarm settings, etc.
explanatory text message3 will also be dis-
played in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi-
Some of the features or functions are stand-
cle in a safe place as soon as possible and
ard; others are optional and vary according to
03
close the door.
model/market.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed
Operation
lower than approximately 5 mph
Use the buttons on the center console or the
(7 km/h), the information symbol illu-
steering wheel keypad to navigate in the
minates.
menus.
nates.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed higher than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the warning symbol illumi-
If the hood is not closed properly, the warning symbol illuminates, a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel and an explanatory text message3 will also be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the hood.
If the tailgate is not closed properly, the information symbol illuminates and a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.
3 Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel
76
03 Instruments and controls
OK/MENU: Press the button on the center console or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to select a menu alternative or to store a selected function in the system's memory.
Information displays ambient temperature sensor
TUNE: Turn this control on the center
console or the thumb wheel on the steer-
ing wheel keypad to navigate up/down in
a menu.
03
EXIT
The center console control panel and the steering wheel keypad. The illustration is generic and the appearance/location of the buttons may vary.
MY CAR: opens the MY CAR menu system.
EXIT functions Depending on which function the cursor is pointing to and the menu level, briefly pressing EXIT will result in:
· An in-coming phone call will be rejected · The current function will be cancelled · Characters entered will be erased · The most recent selection will be cancel-
led
· Go back/up in the menu system
Pressing and holding EXIT takes you to the normal view for MY CAR. If you are already in normal view, this will take you to the main source menu.
Menu selections and paths Please consult your Sensus Infotainment supplement for a description of the MY CAR menu selections and paths.
Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A: digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrument panel
NOTE
When the ambient temperature is between 23° and 36 °F (5° and +2 °C), a snowflake symbol will be displayed next to the temperature. This symbol serves as a warning for possible slippery road surfaces. Please note that this symbol does not indicate a fault with your vehicle. At low speeds or when the vehicle is not moving, the temperature readings may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature.
Related information
· Information displays introduction (p. 68)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
03 Instruments and controls
Information displays trip odometer and clock The trip odometers T1 and T2 and clock are displayed in the instrument panel.
Trip odometers
Clock
03
Inserting/removing remote key The remote key is used to start the engine or to use various electrical functions without starting the engine.
Inserting and removing the remote key
Trip odometer4 Odometer display
Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering wheel lever to display the desired trip odometer. Press and hold the RESET button on the left steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to reset the selected trip odometer5.
Clock, digital instrument panel* Display6
Setting the clock The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu system. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for additional information about these menus.
Go to Settings System options Time settings. Set Auto time to ON (check the box) and select the correct time zone under Location.
Related information
· Information displays introduction (p. 68)
Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP ENGINE button. Inserting the remote key7 Holding the end of the remote key with the base of the key blade, insert the remote key into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration and press it in as far as possible.
CAUTION
Foreign objects in the ignition slot can impair function or cause damage.
4 The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels 5 Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information 6 Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel 7 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
78
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Removing the remote key The remote key can be removed from the ignition slot by pulling it out.
Related information
· Ignition modes (p. 79)
03 Instruments and controls
Ignition modes
Mode Function
The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that can be used without starting the engine. The following table shows examples of which
0
The odometer, clock and tem-
perature gauge are illuminated.
functions are available in the respective
Power seats* can be adjusted
modes.
and the infotainment system can be used for a limited time (to min-
NOTE
imize battery drain, see the Sen-
To access ignition modes I or II without
sus Infotainment Supplement).
03
starting the engine, the brake pedal must not be depressed.
I
The Moonroof*, power windows,
12-volt sockets in the passenger
compartment, navigation sys-
tem*, climate system blower,
windshield wipers can be used.
II The headlights/taillights illuminate. Warning/indicator lights illuminate for 5 seconds. Other systems are activated. However, the heated seats* and heated rear window function can only be activated when the engine is running. Mode II should only be used for very short periods to help avoid draining the battery.
Ignition modes
Ignition mode 0 The vehicle is unlocked.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
03 Instruments and controls
||
Ignition mode I With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot8, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly.
Ignition mode II
Front seats The front seats can be adjusted in a number of ways to help provide the most comfortable seating position.
WARNING · Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as
With the remote key fully pressed into the
far rearward as comfort and control
ignition slot8, press START/STOP
allow.
ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.
03
Returning to mode 0
· Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press
START/STOP ENGINE briefly.
Related information
Starting and stopping the engine See Starting the engine (p. 246) and Switching off the engine (p. 248) for information on
· Front seats power seat (p. 81) · Rear seats folding backrest (p. 86) · Rear seats head restraints (p. 84)
starting the engine and switching it off.
Emergency towing See Towing the vehicle (p. 284) for important information about the remote key when the vehicle is being towed.
Related information
· Inserting/removing remote key (p. 78)
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and move the seat to the position of your choice. Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down. Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest. Electronic lumbar support*. Press the button to adjust. Control panel for power seat*, see Front seats power seat (p. 81).
8 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Front seats folding backrest* The front passenger's seat backrest can be folded down to make it easier to transport long objects.
Return the seat to its upright position in the
Front seats power seat11
reverse order.
The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short
WARNING
period after unlocking the door with the remote control without the key in the ignition
· When transporting long objects, cover
sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
slot. Seat adjustment is normally made when the ignition is on and can always be made when the engine is running.
load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.
Power seat
03
· When the seat's backrest is returned
to the upright position, push and pull it
to be sure that it is securely locked in
this position.
The front passenger seat backrest can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
Move the seat as far back and down as possible. Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest. Without releasing the catches, push the backrest forward. Move the seat as far forward as possible so that the head restraint slides under the glove compartment.
Related information
· Front seats (p. 80) · Front seats power seat (p. 81) · Rear seats folding backrest (p. 86) · Rear seats head restraints (p. 84)
Power seat adjustment controls Front edge of seat cushion up/down Raise/lower the seat Seat forward/rearward Backrest tilt Electronic lumbar support*
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Instruments and controls
|| Operation
NOTE
· Only one of the power seat's controls
can be used at the same time.
· The power seats have an overload
protector that activates if a seat is
blocked by any object. If this occurs,
03
switch off the ignition (key in posi-
tion 0) and wait for a short period
before operating the seat again.
Power seat memory function
Power seat memory buttons Button for storing a position
Button for storing a position
Button for storing a position
M (memory) button
Programming the seat's memory Three different seating and door mirror positions can be stored in the driver seat's memory. The following example explains how button (1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are programmed in the same way. To program (store) a seat and door mirror position in button (1): 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the
desired positions using the seat and mirror adjustment controls. 2. Press and hold down the M (memory) button (4). 3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors. To move the seat and mirrors to the position that they were in when a button was programmed: Press and hold down button (1) until the seat and mirrors stop moving.
NOTE
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position.
Ventilated seats* See Ventilated seats (p. 130). Heated seats* See Heated seats (p. 129). Related information
· Front seats (p. 80) · Rear seats folding backrest (p. 86) · Rear seats head restraints (p. 84)
11 Optional on certain models
82
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Key memory power driver's seat* and door mirrors Each remote key has a memory that enables it to store (remember) the position of the power driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehicle is locked with that remote key.
Remote key memory and the power
3. To activate the remote key memory feature, press ENTER (check the box). > The remote key is now ready to store the position of the power driver's seat and door mirrors.
Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's remote keys.
NOTE
The remote key's memory feature and the power driver's seat memory function (the settings made using the buttons on the side of the seat, see the section "Power seat memory function" in Front seats power seat (p. 81)) work independently of each other.
driver's seat* and door mirrors12
See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
03
Storing the positions of the power driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key
1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the desired position using the seat and mirror adjustment controls.
The key memory has to be activated for each of the remote keys used in the vehicle as follows: 1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.
2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the remote key (or close the driver's door and press the lock button on the door handle with the remote key in your possession on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). > The positions of the power driver's seat and door mirrors are now stored in the remote key's memory.
2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to
Settings Car settings Car key memory
12 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
03 Instruments and controls
||
Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored Emergency stop
positions
To move the seat and door mirrors to the
WARNING
position stored in the remote key: 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same
· Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
remote key (the one used to lock the
should never be left unattended in the
doors). For models equipped with the
vehicle.
03
optional keyless drive, you must have the same remote key in your possession.
· Movement of the seat can be STOP-
PED at any time by pressing any but-
2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position in which you left them (if the vehicle has been unlocked with one of the other keys and new seat/ mirror adjustments have been made).
ton on the power seat control panel.
· Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
NOTE · The seat will move to this position
· The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion.
even if someone else has moved it to a
different position and locked the vehicle with a different remote key.
· This feature will work in the same way
with all of the remote keys that you
Related information
· Remote key functions (p. 155)
use with your vehicle.
Rear seats head restraints The rear seat head restraints can be folded down. The center head restraint can be raised/lowered according to the passenger's height.
Rear center head restraint
84
03 Instruments and controls
The center head restraint should be adjusted according to the passenger's height. The restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head.
· Pull the head restraint up as required.
Manually folding down the rear seat's outboard head restraints
CAUTION
The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods. This could result in pressure marks in leather upholstery.
· To lower, press and hold the button
(located at the center, between the backrest and the head restraint) while pressing
WARNING
the head restrain down carefully.
For safety reasons, no one should be
03
allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat
WARNING
positions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the
The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this
head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) position.
seat is NOT occupied. When the center
position is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger's height. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear.
· Pull the handle closest to the head
restraint to fold it down.
· To return the head restraint to the upright
position, push it up until it clicks into place.
Automatically folding down the rear seat's outboard head restraints
NOTE
· The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.
· The outboard head restraints cannot
be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button.
1. The ignition must be in mode II. 2. Press the button to lower the rear head
restraints for improved visibility.
}} 85
03 Instruments and controls
|| NOTE
· The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.
· The outboard head restraints cannot
be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button.
03
CAUTION
The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods. This could result in pressure marks in leather upholstery.
WARNING
For safety reasons, no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) position.
Related information
· Front seats (p. 80) · Front seats power seat (p. 81) · Rear seats head restraints (p. 84)
Rear seats folding backrest The rear seat head restraints and backrests can be folded down. The center head restraint can be raised/lowered according to the passenger's height.
Folding down the rear seat backrests The three sections of the rear seat backrest can be folded down in different combinations to make it easier to transport long objects.
· The left (driver's side) section can be
folded down separately.
· The center section can be folded down
separately.
· The right (passenger's side) section can
only be folded down together with the center section.
· All three sections can be folded down
together.
CAUTION
To help avoid damage to the upholstery, there should be no objects on the rear seat and the seat belt should not be buckled when the backrest is folded down.
Release and lower the center head restraint (see Rear seats head restraints (p. 84)) if the center and/or right section of the backrest is to be lowered. The outboard head restraints fold down automatically.
Pull up the backrest release control on the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the section(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows that the backrest is not locked in the upright position.
G017903
86
03 Instruments and controls
NOTE
It may be necessary to move the front seats forward or put their backrests in a more upright position before folding down the rear seat backrests.
WARNING · When one or more sections of the
backrest is returned to the upright position, check that it is properly locked in place by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible.
· Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.
· Long loads should always be securely
anchored to help avoid injury in the event of a sudden stop.
· Always turn the engine off and apply
the parking brake when loading/ unloading the vehicle.
· Place the transmission in the Park (P)
position to help prevent inadvertent movement of the gear selector.
· On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.
Related information
· Front seats (p. 80) · Front seats power seat (p. 81) · Rear seats head restraints (p. 84)
Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to various positions and has controls for the horn, cruise control*, menus, the infotainment system and Bluetooth®-connected cell phone. Adjusting
03
G021138
Adjusting the steering wheel Lever for releasing/locking the steering wheel Possible positions
To adjust the steering wheel's height and reach: 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the
steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
03 Instruments and controls
|| 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to push into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever.
control*, see Adaptive Cruise Control introduction (p. 184). Paddles for manually shifting gears (Geartronic), see Transmission Geartronic (p. 253).
Electrically heated* steering wheel The steering wheel can be heated electrically.
WARNING
Infotainment system controls, see Sensus Infotainment supplement.
03
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Horn
With the optional speed-dependent power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 175). Keypads and steering wheel paddles*
Steering wheel keypads and paddles* Cruise control, see Cruise control (CC) introduction (p. 181). Adaptive cruise
Horn Press the steering wheel hub to sound
the horn.
Related information
· Electrically heated* steering wheel
(p. 88)
Button for steering wheel heating With the engine running, press this button once to begin warming the steering wheel (press again to switch off). The indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is active. This function can also be started automatically (the setting can be activated/deactivated in the MY CAR menu) if the vehicle is cold and the ambient temperature is below approximately 50° F (10° C).
88
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel The lighting panel is used to control the daytime running lights, parking lights, etc., and to adjust the instrument panel lighting and "theater" lighting (p. 93).
With the headlight switch in the position:
· In the US: the daytime running lights will
be off
NOTE
The use of Daytime Running Lights is recommended in the United States and is mandatory in Canada.
· In Canada: the daytime running lights will
be on
With the headlight switch in the
posi-
With the headlight switch in the
15
position and the ignition in mode II or if the
engine is running (see Ignition modes (p. 79))
tion:
· The daytime running lights will be off and
the low beam headlights will be on
03
· In the US: the daytime running lights will
be off
· In Canada: the daytime running lights will
be on
Lighting panel overview Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instrument and "theater" lighting (see Instrument and "theater" lighting (p. 93)) Rear fog lights (see Rear fog lights (p. 94)) Headlight switch
Volvo recommends using the tion whenever possible.
posi-
Headlight switch positions Daytime running lights function as follows:
With the headlight switch in the tion:
posi-
· The daytime running lights will be on (the
low beam headlights will automatically switch on in dark conditions)
US models only: The daytime running lights
in
mode can be switched on or off in
the MY CAR menu system under Settings
Car settings Light settings Daytime running lights.
15 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.
89
03 Instruments and controls
High/low beam headlights
When the engine is started, the low beams are activated automatically if the headlight
control is in position
.
03
Headlight switch and steering wheel lever High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams
High beam flash Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to position 1. The high beams come on until the lever is released.
Related information
· Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 92) · Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90) · Lighting panel (p. 89) · Tunnel detection (models with the rain
sensor* only) (p. 92)
Active high beams (AHB)* AHB uses a camera at the upper edge of the windshield to detect the headlights of oncoming vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this happens, the headlights will automatically switch from high beams to low beams. When the camera no longer detects the headlights/taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will switch back to high beams after several seconds.
To activate AHB:
· Turn the headlight control to the
position. The feature will begin functioning if the engine has been running for at least 20 seconds and the vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph (20 km/h).
Continuous high beam headlights
With the headlight switch in the
(in dark
conditions only, when the daytime running
lights have automatically switched off and the
low beam headlights have switched on) or
position:
· Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to
position 2 and release it to toggle between low and high beams.
Headlight switch in the AUTO position
90
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steering wheel lever rearward (toward the steering wheel) as far as possible and releasing it. If AHB is switched off while the high beams are on, the headlights will change to low beams.
NOTE
· Keep the windshield in front of the
camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.
· Do not mount or in any way attach
anything on the windshield that could obstruct the camera.
CAUTION
In the following situations, it may be necessary to switch between high and low beams manually:
· In heavy fog or rain · In blowing snow or slush
· In bright moonlight
If Active high beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is displayed in the instrument panel, switching between high
· In freezing rain · In areas with dim street lighting
03
and low beams will have to be done man-
· When oncoming vehicles have dim
ually. However, the light switch can remain in
front lighting
the
position. The same applies if
· If there are pedestrians on or near the
Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed
road
and the
symbol is displayed. The
· If there are reflective objects, such as
symbol will go out when these messages are
signs, near the road
Models with an analog instrument panel
When AHB is activated, the
symbol will
illuminate in the instrument panel. The high
beam indicator (
) in the instrument panel
will also illuminate when the high beams are
on.
displayed.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active again or if the sensors in the windshield are no longer obscured, the messages will disap-
pear and the
symbol will illuminate.
· When oncoming vehicles' lights are
obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.
· When there are vehicles on connecting
roads
· At the top of hills or in dips in the road · In sharp curves
Models with a digital instrument panel
When AHB is activated,
will illuminate
as a white symbol in the instrument panel.
When the high beams are on, the symbol will
change to blue.
See The camera's limitations (p. 217) for more information about the camera's limitations. Related information
· High/low beam headlights (p. 90)
· Lighting panel (p. 89)
91
03 Instruments and controls
Tunnel detection (models with the rain sensor* only) For models without automatic low beams, tunnel detection activates the low beams when the vehicle enters a tunnel. The low
Active Bending Lights (ABL)* With ABL activated, the headlight beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve according to movements of the steering wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the fol-
NOTE
This function is only active in twilight or dark conditions, and only when the vehicle is in motion.
beams are switched off approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves the tunnel.
lowing illustration).
If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol will illuminate and a message will be dis-
03
The rain sensor reacts to the change in lighting conditions when, for example, the vehicle
played as shown in the table.
enters a tunnel and the tunnel detection fea-
Symbol Display Explanation
ture will then activate the low beam headlights. The low beams will be switched off approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves the tunnel. The rain sensor does not have to be activated for tunnel detection to function.
Headlamp failure Service required
The system is not functioning properly and should be inspected/ repaired by a
Related information
· Lighting panel (p. 89) · High/low beam headlights (p. 90)
Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function deactivated (left) and activated (right) ABL is activated automatically16 when the
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
engine is started.
Related information
The function can be deactivated/reactivated
· Lighting panel (p. 89)
in the MY CAR menu system under My XC70 Active Bending Lights or under Settings Car settings Light settings Active
· High/low beam headlights (p. 90) · Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)
Bending Lights.
See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
16 The factory default setting is on.
92
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Auxiliary lights*
Instrument and "theater" lighting
Parking lights
If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the driver can use the MY CAR menu system to choose to deactivate and turn these lights on and off along with the high beam headlights.
Instrument lighting Illumination of the display and instrument lights will vary, depending on ignition mode.
Turn the headlight switch to the
posi-
tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See My Car introduction
The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel. The intensity of the instrument lighting is
03
(p. 76) for more information about the menu
adjusted with the thumb wheel.
system.
"Theater" lighting
When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone out and the engine is running, several LEDs located near the roof console illuminate to provide faint lighting for the occupants of the front seats. This lighting goes out just after the overhead courtesy lighting when the vehicle is locked. Related information
· Lighting panel (p. 89) · Front interior lighting (p. 96) · Rear interior lighting (p. 97) · Ignition modes (p. 79)
Headlight switch in the parking light position Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II or the engine is running, the daytime running lights will also be on. With the headlight switch in this position, the parking lights will remain on even when the ignition is switched off. In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert anyone traveling behind your vehicle. This happens regardless of the position that the headlight control is in or which mode the ignition is in.
Related information
· Lighting panel (p. 89)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
03 Instruments and controls
Rear fog lights The rear fog lights are considerably brighter than the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters).
03
NOTE
· The rear fog lights are considerably
brighter than the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters).
· Condensation may form temporarily on
the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time.
The rear fog lights will only function in combination with the high/low beam headlights.
Press the button to switch the rear fog lights on/off. > The rear fog light indicator symbol on the instrument panel and the light in the button illuminate when the rear fog lights are switched on.
Related information
· Lighting panel (p. 89)
Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic hazard. When the function is activated, both turn signal indicators in the instrument panel will flash.
Location of the hazard warning flasher button To activate the flashers, press the button
in the center dash. Press the button again to turn off the flashers.
NOTE · Regulations regarding the use of the
hazard warning flasher may vary, depending on where you live.
· The hazard warning flashers will be
activated automatically if an airbag deploys.
94
Related information
· Turn signals (p. 95)
03 Instruments and controls
Turn signals The turn signals are controlled by the left steering wheel lever.
NOTE
· This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction.
· If the turn signal indicator flashes
faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb.
Related information
03
· Hazard warning flashers (p. 94)
Turn signals
When changing lanes The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever up or down to the first position and releasing it.
When turning Move the lever as far up or down as pos-
sible to start the turn signals. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned to its initial position by hand.
95
03 Instruments and controls
Front interior lighting The lighting in the front part of the passenger compartment is controlled with the buttons in the ceiling console.
Overhead courtesy lighting The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically when button (3) is in the neutral position.
Related information
· Rear interior lighting (p. 97)
The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
· the vehicle is unlocked from the outside
03
with the key or remote control
· the engine is switched off and the ignition
is in mode 0.
The lighting switches off when:
· the engine is started · the vehicle is locked from the outside.
G021149
Light switches, front roof lighting Drivers side front reading light, on/off
Passenger's side front reading light, on/off
The lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open. The passenger compartment lighting can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes after the vehicle has been unlocked.
Overhead courtesy lighting.
Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger compartment lighting:
· Off: right side depressed, automatic light-
ing off.
· Neutral position: automatic lighting is
on.
· On left side depressed, passenger
compartment lighting on.
If the lighting is switched on manually and the vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will switch off automatically after one minute.
Courtesy lights/door step lighting* The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch on/off automatically when one of the front doors is opened/closed.
Glove compartment lighting The glove compartment lighting switches on/off automatically when the lid is opened/ closed.
96
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Rear interior lighting The lights are switched on or off by pressing each respective button.
Rear reading lights Cargo area lighting The cargo area lighting comes on automatically when the tailgate is opened. Related information
· Front interior lighting (p. 96)
G021150
Home safe lighting
Approach lighting
When you leave your vehicle at night, you can Approach lighting activates the parking lights,
make use of the home safe lighting function
door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome
to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.
lighting and door step lighting when you
This function illuminates the headlights, park-
approach the vehicle.
ing lights, lights in the door mirrors, license
This function is activated by pressing the
plate lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell
approach light button on the remote key (see
lighting. These lights will remain on for 30 17, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be
the illustration in Remote key functions (p. 155)).
03
set in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to put the ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the ignition modes).
The time interval for this lighting can be set by pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings Light settings Approach light duration. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
Related information
· Home safe lighting (p. 97)
2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible towards the steering wheel and release it.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
Related information
· Approach lighting (p. 97)
17 Factory setting
97
03 Instruments and controls
Windshield wipers Move the lever toward the steering wheel to start the windshield and headlight washers. After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps.
03
Windshield wipers and washers Rain sensor* on/off Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency
CAUTION · Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation.
· Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in place.
Windshield wipers off Move the lever to position 0 to switch off the windshield wipers.
Single sweep Move the lever upward from position 0 to sweep the windshield one stroke at a time for as long as the
lever is held up. Intermittent wiping
With the lever in this position, you can set the wiper interval by twisting the thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed or downward to decrease the speed. Continuous wiping The wipers operate at normal speed.
The wipers operate at high speed.
Windshield wiper service position The windshield wipers must be in the service position before the wiper blades can be cleaned or replaced. See Wiper blades service position (p. 342) for additional information.
Related information
· Engine compartment washer fluid
(p. 344)
Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper speed according to the amount of water on the windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up (the wipers will sweep the windshield more frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently).
NOTE
The wipers will make an extra sweep each time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.
When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle must be running or in ignition mode II and the windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or in the single sweep position.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
ton
. The windshield wipers will make
one sweep.
Press the lever up for the wipers to make an extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active mode when the stalk is released back to position 0.
98
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Deactivating
Windshield washer
every five times the windshield is washed
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
button
or press the lever down to
Move the lever toward the steering wheel to start the windshield and headlight washers.
within a 10-minute period.
· Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-
another wiper position. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the key is removed from the ignition slot or five minutes after the ignition has been
After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps.
ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.
switched off.
CAUTION
03
CAUTION
The rain sensor should be deactivated when washing the car in an automatic car wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the car wash and could be damaged.
· Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation.
· When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of
washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the headlights will no longer be
washed. A text message will also be
Washing function
displayed to remind the driver to fill the washer fluid reservoir.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing.
Related information
· Engine compartment washer fluid
(p. 344)
High-pressure headlight washing* High-pressure headlight washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlights are washed using two alternatives:
· Low/high beam headlights on. The
headlights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
03 Instruments and controls
Tailgate wiper/washer The tailgate wiper operates at two speeds: intermittent and continuous.
03
Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer.
Intermittent wiping Normal (continuous) wiping
NOTE
The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off function, which means that it will not operate if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will function again after a cool-down period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat of the motor and ambient temperature conditions).
Tailgate wiper and reverse gear If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will go into intermittent wiping function18. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected.
NOTE
On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, the tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and it is raining.
If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous) wiping mode, selecting different gears will not affect its function. Related information
· Engine compartment washer fluid
(p. 344)
Power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors.
Driver's door control panel Switch for disengaging rear door power window buttons Rear door window controls Front door window controls.
18 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.
100
03 Instruments and controls
WARNING · Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended to put the ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the ignition modes).
· Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
· Make sure that the windows are com-
pletely unobstructed before they are operated. Operating
Operating the power windows Manual up/down Auto up/down.
For the power windows to function, the ignition must be in at least mode I. When the
vehicle has been running, the power windows 3. Raise the front section of the button again
can be operated for several minutes after the
for one second.
remote key has been removed from the ignition slot, or until a door has been opened.
Laminated glass* This glass is reinforced to help pro-
NOTE
· Movement of the windows will stop if
they are obstructed in any way.
· To reduce buffeting wind noise if the
rear windows are opened, also open
vide protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
The windshield, optional moonroof and other windows have laminated glass.
03
the front windows slightly.
Manual up/down Move one of the controls up/down
slightly. > The power windows move up/down as
long as the control is held in position. Auto up/down Move one of the controls up/down as far
as possible and release it. > The window will open or close com-
pletely.
Resetting If the battery has been disconnected, the auto open function must be reset so that it will work properly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101
03 Instruments and controls
Power door mirrors The control on the driver's door is used to adjust the position of the door mirrors.
Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
To activate this function, select reverse gear and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt the mirror down.
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
The function can be activated/deactivated in
same time.
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
2. Release them after approximately one
Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt
second. The mirrors automatically stop in
right mirror. See My Car introduction
03
the fully retracted position.
(p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
The door mirror will reset to its normal posi-
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
tion:
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
· after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-
gaged and the car remains stopped.
Door mirror controls
Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror
or the R button for the right door mirror. The light in the button comes on. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the center. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be on.
Storing the position* The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the vehicle has been locked with the remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with the same remote control the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car key memory Personal settings in key memory. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
· immediately when reverse is disengaged
and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
· immediately if you press the correspond-
ing L or R button again.
· when the engine is turned off. · when the side mirrors are folded in.
NOTE
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.
WARNING
Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are.
Tilting the door mirrors when parking* The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.
Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors comes on when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected, see Approach lighting (p. 97) and Home safe lighting (p. 97).
102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
· Interior rearview mirror (p. 104) · Heated windshield*, rear window and
door mirror defrosters (p. 104)
· Power door mirrors automatic tilting/
retraction (p. 103)
03 Instruments and controls
Power door mirrors automatic
Resetting to neutral
tilting/retraction
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
The control on the driver's door is used to
by an external force must be electrically reset
adjust the position of the door mirrors.
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work.
Automatically tilting the door mirrors when parking
The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle, for example when paral-
· Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
tons.
· Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
03
lel parking. When the transmission is no
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
longer in reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to their original position.
This function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Related information
· Interior rearview mirror (p. 104) · Heated windshield*, rear window and
door mirror defrosters (p. 104)
Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt
left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right
mirror. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for
information about the MY CAR menu system.
Automatic retraction when locking When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors when locking. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103
03 Instruments and controls
Heated windshield*, rear window and door mirror defrosters The heating function is used to defrost/de-ice the windshield and/or the rear window and door mirrors.
Climate settings Automatic rear defroster. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
03
Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear window and door mirror defroster (2) Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the windshield and/or button (2) to defrost the rear window and door mirrors. The indicator lights in the respective buttons indicate that the function is active. Switch the function off when then windshield/rear window/mirrors have cleared to help avoid battery drain. The heating function will also switch off automatically after a certain amount of time. Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the ambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C) can be selected in MY CAR under Settings
Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim function that helps reduce glare from following vehicle's headlights. Auto-dim function The interior rearview mirror's auto-dim function is controlled by two sensors: one pointing forward (located on the forward-facing side of the mirror, which monitors the amount of ambient light) and one pointing rearward (located on the side of the mirror facing the driver at the upper edge, which senses the strength of following vehicles' headlights), and work together to help eliminate glare.
NOTE
Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g., parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear sensor by loading the cargo area or the rear seat in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensor will reduce the auto-dim function in the rearview mirror.
Related information
· Power door mirrors (p. 102)
104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Digital compass* The rear-view mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the vehicle is traveling. Operation
Rearview mirror with compass. Eight different directions are shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). The compass is displayed automatically when the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To switch the compass on/off use a pen, paperclip or similar object and press in the button on the rear side of the mirror. Calibration North America is divided into 15 magnetic zones and the compass will need to be calibrated if the vehicle is driven into a new one
G029737 G018632
(see the magnetic zones on the map in the following section "Selecting a magnetic zone"). To do so: 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area,
safely out of traffic and away from steel structures and high-tension electrical wires. 2. Start the vehicle.
NOTE · For best calibration results, switch off
all electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate system, windshield wipers, audio system, etc.) and make sure that all doors are closed.
· Calibration may not succeed or be
incorrect if the vehicle's electrical equipment is not switched off.
6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mirror.
7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed. This indicates that calibration is complete.
8. Drive around in a circle an additional two
times to fine-tune the calibration.
03
9. Vehicles with an electrically heated
windshield:* if C is displayed when the
heating function is activated, perform
step 7 with the heating function on. See
also Max. defroster and electrically
heated windshield* (p. 132) for additional
information about the heated windshield.
Repeat the calibration procedure if necessary.
Selecting a magnetic zone
3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed in the mirror.
4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds until the number of the current magnetic zone is displayed.
5. Press the button repeatedly until the number of the desired magnetic zone (1-15) is displayed. See the magnetic zones on the map in the following section "Selecting a magnetic zone").
1 2 3 4
5
Magnetic zones.
15 14
13
12
8 11
9 10
6
7
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 105
03 Instruments and controls
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The correct zone must be selected for the compass to work correctly.
Power moonroof* introduction The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling console near the rearview mirror.
Wind blocker
1. Put the ignition in mode II.
The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically
2. Using a pen or similar object, press and
but has to be closed manually.
hold the button on the rear side of mirror
There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's
for at least 3 seconds. The number for the front edge.
current area will be shown.
03 3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the required geographic area (1 15) is shown.
The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling console near the rearview mirror. The moonroof can be opened vertically and horizontally. The vehicle's ignition must be in
4. The display will revert to showing the
mode I or II for the moonroof to be operated.
compass direction after several seconds.
The moonroof is equipped with a wind
CAUTION
blocker that folds up when the moonroof is
· Remove ice and snow before opening
open.
the moonroof.
· Do not operate the moonroof if it is
frozen closed.
· Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof.
Visor The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visor slides open automatically when the moonroof is opened, and must be closed manually.
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof* operation
Automatic opening
WARNING
The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling console near the rearview mirror. The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically but has to be closed manually. There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's front edge.
Sliding moonroof
Pull the switch as far back as possible (to the position for automatic opening) and release it to automatically fully slide open the moonroof.
Manual opening Pull the switch back to the first stop (the
position for manual opening) and hold it until the moonroof has opened to the position of your choice.
· During manual closing, if the moonroof
is obstructed, immediately open it again.
· Never open or close the moonroof if it
is obstructed in any way.
· Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.
· Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
03
Manual closing Push the switch forward to the first stop
(the position for manual closing) and hold it until the moonroof has closed to the position of your choice, or has closed completely.
Automatic closing Push the switch as far forward as possi-
ble (the position for automatic closing) and release it to automatically close the
· When leaving the vehicle, ensure that
the ignition is in mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the various ignition modes) to disable the moonroof. Never leave the remote key in the vehicle.
· Never extend any object or body part
though the open moonroof, even if the vehicle's ignition is completely switched off.
G017823
Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward
moonroof.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 107
03 Instruments and controls
|| Tilt position
HomeLink® Wireless Control System* introduction HomeLink® can be used to open garage doors, gates, etc.
G028900
03
Tilt position, raised at the rear edge Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and hold it until the moonroof has closed completely.
WARNING
· If you use HomeLink® to open a
garage door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion.
· When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage.
· Do not use HomeLink® with any
garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com.
The HomeLink®19 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Additional information can be found on the Internet at, www.homelink.com/ www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 18003553515.
19 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Retain the original transmitter of the RF
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
device you are programming for use in other
programming
chosen HomeLink and hand-held trans-
vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Resetting HomeLink Buttons" in HomeLink® Wireless Control System* programming (p. 109).
The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Additional information can be found on the Inter-
mitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
NOTE
03
Using HomeLink To operate, simply press and hold the programmed HomeLink button until the trained device begins to operate (this may take several seconds). Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener,
net atwww.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 18003553515.
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to
Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Programming" section. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com/
gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming difficulties or
be switched on or be in the "accessories" position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 18003553515.
questions, contact HomeLink at:
and accurate transmission of the radio-fre-
www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/
quency signal. The HomeLink buttons
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at
must be reset first. When this has been
18003553515.
completed, Homelink is in learning mode so that you can perform programming.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will function for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 13 inches (514 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 109
03 Instruments and controls
||
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
· If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.
03
and your device should activate when
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
· If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with "Programming" steps 4-6 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit.
5. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
culties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Programming" procedures, replace "Programming HomeLink" step 2 with the following:
· Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release every two seconds ("cycle") your handheld transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held trans-
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
mitter buttons.
hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second
Proceed with "Programming" step 3 to complete.
time, and, depending on the brand of the
Resetting HomeLink Buttons
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.
Use the following procedure to reset (erase programming) from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be reset but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined in the fol-
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
lowing section):
code equipped device.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash.
110
03 Instruments and controls
2. Release both buttons. > HomeLink is now in the training (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" - step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with "Programming" - step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com/ www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 18003553515.
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.20
Volvo Sensus Volvo Sensus is the core of the contact interface with your vehicle. Sensus provides information, entertainment and offers access to functions that make owning and operating a Volvo easier.
03
Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle and it enables you to interact intuitively with the vehicle's various features and functions, including accessing the Internet, when it suits you. Volvo Sensus uses the center console screen to display information and menus, and to offer a user interface that enables you to make personalized settings for e.g., vehicle, infotainment and climate system functions. The buttons on the center console or the steering wheel keypad are used to activate/ deactivate functions and change numerous settings.
20 The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
}} 111
03 Instruments and controls
|| Pressing the MY CAR button on the center console displays all of the settings related to driving and operating the vehicle, such as City Safety, lock and alarm functions, automatic blower speed, setting the clock, etc.
Pressing the source buttons on the center
console (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, , NAV* and
CAM*, etc.) make it possible to select e.g.,
03
AM or FM radio, play a CD or DVD, use the
Bluetooth® hands-free feature, the navigation
system* or the park assist camera*.
Information display menu controls The controls on the left steering wheel lever are used to access the menus (p. 113) that are displayed in the instrument panel (p. 68). The menus displayed depend on the current ignition mode (p. 79).
See your on-board owner's manual or the separate printed supplements for detailed information about the functionality offered by Volvo Sensus.
Center console control panel Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* NAV: see the separate VNS manual for operating instructions.
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL)
Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR. Internet connected vehicle.
Analog Instrument panel and menu controls
Climate system.
Park assist camera - CAM*.
Related information
· My Car introduction (p. 76) · Climate general information (p. 124) · Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) intro-
duction (p. 236)
112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
Information display menu overview
Information display messages
Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls OK: access to the list of messages (p. 113) and message confirmation. Thumb wheel: browse among menus and options in the list of functions.
The menus displayed depend on the current ignition mode (p. 79).
The following menu alternatives may vary, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.
Analog instrument panel Digital speed Trip comp. opt. Service status Messages (##)21
Digital instrument panel* Settings Themes
The controls on the left steering wheel lever are used to scroll among messages displayed in the instrument panel and to confirm selections. When information, indicator or warning symbols illuminate, an explanatory message will be displayed in the instrument panel.
03 When a warning (p. 74), information (p. 72) or indicator symbol (p. 72) comes on, a corresponding message appears in the information panel. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault is rectified. Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among the messages.
NOTE
RESET: reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective function. The menus shown on the information displays in the instrument panel are controlled with the left lever. The menus displayed depend on ignition mode. Press OK to erase a message and return to the menus.
Contrast mode/Color mode Service status Messages Trip computer reset
Related information
· Information displays introduction (p. 68) · Information display menu controls
(p. 112)
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read and confirmed by pressing OK before the previous activity can be resumed.
· Information display messages (p. 113)
21 Number of messages in parentheses
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 113
03 Instruments and controls
|| Message
Description
Stop engineA
Stop and switch off the engine as soon as possible. Serious risk of damage. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the
03
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Contact an
authorized Volvo work-
shop.
Service urgentA
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop immediately.
Service requiredA
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
Book time for maintenance
Time to book service at an authorized Volvo retailer.
Message Description
Time for regular maintenance
Time for regular service at an authorized Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of miles driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time.
Maintenance overdue
If the service intervals are not followed, the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for service.
Temporarily OFFA
A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.
Low battery Power save mode
The audio system is switched off to save current. Charge the battery.
A There will also be a system-specific part of this message
Related information
· Information displays introduction (p. 68) · Information display menu overview
(p. 113)
· Information display menu controls
(p. 112)
114
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer introduction The content and appearance of the trip computer varies depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with an Analog or Digital instrument panel.
The instrument panel illuminates as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and trip computer settings can be made. If none of the trip computer's controls are used within 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened, the instrument panel lighting will go out and the trip computer cannot be used again until:
· the ignition is put in mode II22
· the engine is started
03
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowledge a message by pressing OK.
Analog information display and controls
Related information
· Trip computer functions, analog instru-
ment panel (p. 116)
· Trip computer functions, digital instru-
ment panel (p. 119)
· Trip computer Supplementary informa-
tion (p. 121)
· Trip computer Trip statistics (p. 122)
Digital information displays and controls
22 See Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the various ignition modes.
115
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer functions, analog instrument panel
03 Information display and controls
OKpress to access the trip computer's functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase a message Thumb wheelturn to access the list of trip computer information headings and to scroll among the alternatives RESETpress to cancel/reset/exit a function after a selection has been made The trip computer has two different menu groups:
· Trip computer functions · Trip computer information headings in the
instrument panel
Functions To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:
1. Ensure that none of the trip computer controls are being used in a command sequence; reset them by pressing RESET twice.
2. Press OK to open the list of functions. 3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the
functions and select/confirm your choice by pressing OK. 4. After completing your selection, exit by pressing RESET twice. The following table lists the analog trip computer's functions:
116
03 Instruments and controls
Function
Description
Digital speed km/h mph None
This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel
· Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing
ENTER.
Trip comp. opt. Distance to empty Fuel consumption Average speed
Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have already been selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked and
03
are displayed in gray:
1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel.
2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked.
Trip odometer T1 and total dist.
3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET.
Trip odometer T2 and total dist.
Service status
Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.
Messages (##)
For additional information, see Information display menu controls (p. 112).
Information headings Any of the information headings in the following table can be displayed. To do so:
1. Ensure that none of the trip computer controls are being used in a command sequence; reset them by pressing RESET twice.
2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin displaying the information headings. Stop on the desired heading.
3. See the table for an explanation of the heading or the actions that can be taken.
}} 117
03 Instruments and controls
|| Information headings in the instrument panel
Description
Trip odometer T1 and total dist. Trip odometer T2 and total dist.
· Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1. · Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.
Distance to empty
See Distance to empty in Trip computer Supplementary information (p. 121).
03
Fuel consumption
Average speed
Current fuel consumption. Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.
-
No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information
headings.
Scroll among the trip computer information headings at any time by turning the thumb wheel until the desired heading is displayed.
Related information
· Trip computer introduction (p. 115) · Trip computer functions, digital instru-
ment panel (p. 119)
· Trip computer Supplementary informa-
tion (p. 121)
· Trip computer Trip statistics (p. 122)
118
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer functions, digital instrument panel
Information displays and controls
OKpress to access the trip computer's functions or to activate a selection Thumb wheelturn to access the list of trip computer information headings and to scroll among the alternatives
1. Ensure that none of the trip computer controls are being used in a command sequence; reset them by pressing RESET twice.
2. Press OK to open the list of functions.
RESETpress to cancel/reset/exit a function after a selection has been made
3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the functions and select/confirm your choice
The trip computer has two different menu groups:
· Trip computer functions
by pressing OK.
03
4. After completing your selection, exit by
pressing RESET twice.
· Trip computer information headings in the
instrument panel
The following table lists the digital trip computer's functions:
Functions To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:
Function Trip computer reset Average fuel consumption Average speed Messages
Themes
Settings*
Description NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see Trip computer Supplementary information (p. 121) for a description of how this is done.
For additional information, see Information display menu controls (p. 112). Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see Information displays introduction (p. 68). Select Auto On or Off.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 119
03 Instruments and controls
|| Function Contrast mode/Color mode
Service status
Description Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color. Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.
Information headings
1. Ensure that none of the trip computer
3. See the table for an explanation of the
Three trip computer headings can be dis-
controls are being used in a command
heading or the actions that can be taken.
03
played at the same time; one in each of the displays (see the previous illustration). One of the combinations of information headings in the following table can be displayed. To do so:
sequence; reset them by pressing RESET twice. 2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin displaying the combinations of information headings. Stop on the desired combination.
Scroll among the combinations of trip computer information headings at any time by turning the thumb wheel until the desired combination is displayed.
Heading combinations
Description
Average fuel consumption
Trip odometer T1 + mileage
Average speed · Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.
Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mile- Distance to empty · Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.
age
Current fuel consumption
Mileage
mph<>km/h
Change between mph<>km/h see "Digital speed display" in Trip computer Supplementary information (p. 121).
-
No trip computer informa-
-
No information will be displayed. This also indicates the begin-
tion displayed
ning/end of the list of information headings.
Scroll among the trip computer information headings at any time by turning the thumb wheel until the desired heading is displayed.
Related information
· Trip computer introduction (p. 115) · Trip computer functions, analog instru-
ment panel (p. 116)
· Trip computer Supplementary informa-
tion (p. 121)
· Trip computer Trip statistics (p. 122)
120
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer Supplementary information
driving style will generally increase this distance.
2. Select one of the following alternatives using the thumb wheel and press OK:
General information for both Analog and Digital trip computer functions.
See Economical driving (p. 279) for information about driving economically.
· mpg · mph
Average fuel consumption
Digital speed display*
· Reset both
Fuel consumption since the last time this function was reset.
Speed is expressed in the unit not used by the instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if
3. Finish by pressing RESET.
Average speed The vehicle's average speed since the last time this function was reset.
Current fuel consumption Current fuel consumption is calculated
the normal speedometer is in mph, the trip computer will display in the speed in km/h and vice versa.
Resetting an analog instrument panel Trip odometer(s) and average speed
Changing units To change the unit (miles/km) used to meas-
03
ure distance and speed, go to MY CAR
Settings System options Distance
and fuel units.
approximately once a second. When the vehicle is moving at low speed, fuel consumption is displayed per unit of time. At higher speeds, it is displayed in terms of distance.
1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Average speed.
2. Press and hold RESET until selected function is reset.
NOTE
In addition to changing units in the trip computer, this also changes the units used in the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*.
Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the heading "Changing units".
Distance to empty This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank. When Distance to empty shows "----", there is very little useable fuel remaining in that tank; refuel as soon as possible. The calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank (the accuracy of this figure may vary if your driving style changes). An economical
Each trip computer heading must be reset individually.
Resetting a digital instrument panel Trip odometer 1. Turn the thumb wheel to select the com-
bination of headings containing the trip odometer to be reset.
2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip odometer is reset.
Average speed and fuel consumption 1. Select Trip computer reset and press
OK.
Related information
· Trip computer introduction (p. 115) · Trip computer functions, analog instru-
ment panel (p. 116)
· Trip computer functions, digital instru-
ment panel (p. 119)
· Trip computer Trip statistics (p. 122)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer Trip statistics Trip information from previous trips regarding average fuel consumption and average speed is stored and can be displayed in the form of a bar chart.
Function
MY CAR My XC70 Trip statistics:
· Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all
pervious statistics. Exit the menu by pressing EXIT.
· Reset for every driving cycle: select by
pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by pressing EXIT.
03
Selecting Reset for every driving cycle erases all trip statistics automatically if the igni-
tion is switched off for at least 4 hours. When
the engine is restarted, new statistics will be
stored.
To get new statistics if the engine is restarted before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing ones have to be erased manually by selecting Start new trip.
Trip statistics23 Each bar represents a driving distance of 1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the current scale; the bar at the far right shows the value for the current mile/10 miles. Use TUNE to change between 1 mile and 10 miles; the marker at the right will also change according to the scale selected.
Settings Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu system as follows:
For additional information, see Information display menu controls (p. 112).
See also the information about Eco Guide in Eco Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 71).
Related information
· Trip computer introduction (p. 115) · Trip computer functions, analog instru-
ment panel (p. 116)
· Trip computer functions, digital instru-
ment panel (p. 119)
· Trip computer Supplementary informa-
tion (p. 121)
23 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
CLIMATE
04 Climate
Climate general information
Temporary shut-off of the air
Climate sensors
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Cli-
conditioning
The climate system utilizes a number of sen-
mate Control (ECC) (p. 128) that cools, heats
The air conditioning (p. 131) is momentarily
sors to help regulate the temperature and
or dehumidifies the air in the passenger com-
disengaged during full acceleration or when
humidity level in the passenger compartment.
partment. Air conditioning
driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature. Ice and snow
Sensor location
· The sunlight sensor is located on the top
side of the dashboard.
NOTE
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
· The air conditioning can be switched
the windshield free of snow.
NOTE
off, but to ensure the best possible cli-
Climate system maintenance
The sunlight sensor monitors which side of
mate comfort in the passenger com-
04
partment and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be on.
· In warm weather, a small amount of
Special tools and equipment are required to maintain and carry out repairs on the climate system. Work of this type should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
the car that is most exposed to sunlight. This can mean that the temperature may differ between the right and left-side air vents, even if the temperatures set for both sides of the passenger compartment are
water may accumulate under the car
technician.
the same.
when it has been parked. This water is
condensation from the A/C system and is normal.
Side windows and moonroof To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally, the side windows, and the optional moonroof should be closed. Fog on the inside of the windows The defroster function (p. 132) should be used to remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean
Refrigerant Volvo cares about the environment. The air conditioning system in your car contains a CFC-free refrigerant R134a. This substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The air conditioning system contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) of R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.
Related information
· Climate sensors (p. 124) · Climate menu settings (p. 126)
· The temperature sensor for the passen-
ger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
· The outside (ambient) temperature sensor
is located on the door mirror.
· The humidity sensor* is located in the
interior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
with a commercially available window wash-
ing spray will also help prevent fogging or misting.
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Climate
Air quality The passenger compartment has been designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with asthma and contact allergies. Passenger compartment filter Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended intervals. Please refer to your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, or consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for these intervals. The filter should be replaced more often when driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should always be replaced with a new one.
NOTE
There are different types of cabin air filters. Ensure that the correct type is installed.
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.
NOTE
Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter replacement intervals.
Materials used in the cabin The materials used in the cabin have been developed to help minimize the amount of dust and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning. Use car cleaning products recommended by Volvo. See also the information in Cleaning the interior (p. 362).
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
(p. 125)
· Climate menu settings (p. 126)
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* The Air Quality System (IAQS) consists of a multifilter and an air quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases and particles from the incoming air, thereby reducing the amounts of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle.
The air quality (p. 125) sensor detects
increased levels of contaminants in the out-
side air. When the air quality sensor detects
contaminated outside air, the air intake closes
and the air inside the passenger compart-
ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters
the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated
04
passenger compartment air. When the
AUTO (p. 131) button is depressed the air
quality sensor is always engaged.
Activate or deactivate this function in Climate settings Interior air quality system.
NOTE
· The air quality sensor should always
be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment.
· Recirculation is limited in cold weather
to avoid fogging.
· If the insides of the windows start fog-
ging, disengage the air quality sensor. Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front, side, and rear windows.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 125
04 Climate
|| Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Max. defroster and electrically heated
windshield* (p. 132)
04
Climate menu settings The default settings for four of the climate system's (p. 124) functions can be changed in the menu system.
· Blower speed (p. 130) in automatic
mode (p. 131).
· Recirculation timer (p. 134) for passenger
compartment air.
· Automatic rear window defrost-
ing (p. 104).
· The optional Interior Air Quality Sys-
tem (p. 125) (IAQS). The functions can also be returned to factory settings in the menu system.
See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
Related information
· Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 128)
Air distribution general The incoming air is distributed through a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode (p. 131). If desired, air distribution can be controlled manually, see Air distribution function (p. 133).
G017699
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air vents in the dashboard
Air vents in the door pillars
04 Climate
G021368
Open
Open
04
Closed
Closed
Horizontal airflow
Horizontal airflow
Vertical airflow
Vertical airflow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat.
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Air distribution table (p. 135) · Air distribution recirculation (p. 134) · Max. defroster and electrically heated
windshield* (p. 132)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127
04 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC) ECC (Electronic Climate Control) helps maintain the selected temperature in the passenger compartment and the temperature can be
set separately on the driver's and passenger's sides.
The AUTO function (p. 131) automatically regulates the temperature, air conditioning, blower speed, recirculation and air distribution.
04
Temperature control (p. 130), driver's side Heated driver's seat* (p. 129)1 Defroster (maximum effect), electrically heated windshield* (p. 132) Blower (p. 130)
Manual air distribution (p. 126)--floor
Manual air distribution--dashboard air vents
Manual air distribution--defroster
Heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 104) Heated front passenger's seat* (p. 129)
Temperature control (p. 130), passenger's side Recirculation (p. 134)
AUTO (p. 131)
1 The location of the button varies, depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with the optional ventilated front seats
128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A/C (p. 131) on/off Ventilated driver's seat (p. 130)* Ventilated passenger's seat* (p. 130)*
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
04 Climate
Heated seats The front seat heating has three levels to increase comfort for the driver and passenger in cold weather. The rear outboard seat heating has three levels to increase comfort for the passengers in cold weather.
Heated front seats*
Lowest heat level one indicator light.
If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat heating is switched off.
Seat heating will automatically switch off when the engine is switched off. Starting the seat heating automatically This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at the highest level) automatically when the engine is started if the ambient temperature is below approx. 50° F (10° C).
Heat control for the outboard seating positions is done in the same way as for the front seats. Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 128) · Ventilated seats (p. 130)
Activate/deactivate this function in the
MY CAR menu system, under Settings
04
Climate settings Auto start driver seat
heater.
Heated rear seats*2
The current seat temperature setting is shown in the center console display
Press the lower section of the button repeatedly until the desired number of indicator lights illuminate: Highest heat level three indicator lights. Medium heat level two indicator lights.
2 Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129
04 Climate
Ventilated seats
· Press the button a fourth time to switch
Temperature and blower control
Seat ventilation can be used at the same time as seat heating (p. 129) to e.g., help remove
off the function the indicator light will go out.
When the vehicle is started, the most recent setting is resumed.
dampness from the seat occupant's clothing.
Ventilated front seats* The ventilation system consists of fans in the
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
The blower should always be activated to help avoid condensation and fogging on the windows.
seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases as the air in the passenger compartment becomes cooler.
Temperature control The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set separately.
The ventilation is controlled by the ECC sys-
04
tem (p. 128), which takes into account the seat temperature, sunlight in the passenger
compartment, and the ambient temperature.
The ventilation can be used at the same time as seat heating. The ventilation system can be activated when the engine is running. There are three comfort levels that produce different cooling and dehumidifying effects:
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required.
Blower control
· Level three: press the button once for
maximum output three indicator lights come on.
· Level two: press the button twice for a
lower output two indicator lights come on.
· Level one: press the button three times
for the lowest output one indicator light comes on.
adjustment.
Turn the control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the blower speed. If AUTO (p. 131) is selected, blower speed will be regulated automatically and this will override manual
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Climate
NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the air conditioning is disengaged, which may result in fogging on the windows.
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 128) · Air conditioning (p. 131) · Climate sensors (p. 124)
Automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The Auto function automatically controls tem- The air conditioning function cools and dehu-
perature (p. 130), air conditioning (p. 131),
midifies the air in the passenger compart-
blower speed (p. 130), recirculation (p. 134)
ment.
and air distribution (p. 126).
When the indicator light in
If you select one or more
the button is on, the air con-
manual functions, the other
ditioning is controlled auto-
functions continue to be
matically. This cools/heats
controlled automatically. The
and dehumidifies the incom-
air quality (p. 125) sensor is
ing air. When the indicator
engaged and all manual set-
light in the button is off, the
tings are switched off when
air conditioning is disengaged. Other func-
AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO
tions are still controlled automatically. When
04
CLIMATE.
maximum defroster (p. 132) is selected, the
Blower speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
air conditioning system is set for maximum blower speed and dehumidifies the cabin as quickly as possible.
or High.
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
NOTE
· Automatic climate control (p. 131)
Selecting the lowest blower speed may increases the risk of fog forming on the windows.
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
131
04 Climate
Max. defroster and electrically heated windshield* The heated windshield and max. defroster functions are used to clear the windshield and front side windows of condensation and ice as quickly as possible.
Models without an electrically heated windshield
· Press the button once to start
defrosting/de-icing the windshield and front side windows. The indicator light (2) in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.
· Press the button twice to switch off the
defroster (the indicator light will switch off).
NOTE
· Triangular areas at the far sides of the
windshield are not heated electrically and will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice.
· The heated windshield may affect the
performance/range of e.g., transponders used to automatically pay highway tolls or other communication equipment.
Models with an electrically heated wind-
shield*
The following occurs when the defroster/
04
· If this feature is switched off, press the
windshield heating functions have been acti-
button once to start heating the wind-
vated:
shield3. Symbol (1) will illuminate in the center console display.
· Press the button twice to start both the
· Blower speed increases automatically
and the air conditioning (p. 131) will switch on (if not already on and if the pas-
The selected settings are shown in the center console display
defroster and the windshield heating. Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the center console display.
senger compartment blower is not turned off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment. Air conditioning can be
Electrical heating* Max. defroster
· If these features are on, press the button
to switch them off. The symbols will no longer be displayed.
switched off by pressing the AC button.
· Recirculation (p. 134) will not function
while defrost is engaged.
The climate system will return to its previous settings when the defroster/windshield heating function is switched off.
See also Heated windshield*, rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 104) for additional information.
3 If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see Digital compass* (p. 105).
132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Automatic climate control (p. 131)
Air distribution function The air distribution function consists of three buttons.
04 Climate
Air distribution is shown in the center console
display
04
Manual air distribution--defroster
Manual air distribution--dashboard air vents Manual air distribution--floor
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Air distribution general (p. 126) · Air distribution recirculation (p. 134)
When a button is pressed, the corresponding figure will appear in the display with an arrow indicating which manual air flow has been selected (see the following illustration). See also the air distribution chart (p. 135).
133
04 Climate
Air distribution recirculation Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger compartment.
· Air distribution general (p. 126) · Air distribution function (p. 133)
The air in the passenger
· Air distribution table (p. 135)
compartment is then recircu-
lated, i.e., no air from outside
the car is taken into the car
when this function is acti-
vated. The indicator light in
the button will illuminate
when recirculation is selected.
04
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.
Timer The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging, or stale air when the recirculation function is selected by automatically switching off the function after a certain length of time, depending on the ambient temperature. Activate/deactivate the function under Climate
settings Recirculation timer. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
134
Air distribution table Air distribution (p. 126) is selected using the buttons in the center console climate panel.
Air distribution Air to windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
Use To remove de-fog/deice the front side windows and windshield quickly.
Air to windshield and side windows. Some air flows from the air dashboard vents.
In cold or humid weather (blower speed should be moderate to high).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.
To ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents.
To ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
04 Climate
Air distribution Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.
Use To ensure comfortable conditions and good defogging in cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
In sunny weather with cool outside tempera-
04
tures.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
To warm or cool the feet.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
To cool the feet or provide warmer air to the upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
}} 135
04 Climate
|| Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Air distribution function (p. 133) · Max. defroster and electrically heated
windshield* (p. 132) 04
136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
LOADING AND STORAGE
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces The following is an overview of the storage compartments in the passenger compartment.
05
138
Compartment in door panel Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment (p. 141) Storage compartment (p. 140), 12-volt socket (p. 140) and AUX input Rear seat cup holders Storage pocket
Related information
· Vanity mirror (p. 141) · 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)
05 Loading and storage
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139
05 Loading and storage
Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.
Tunnel console 12-volt sockets The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current, the ignition must be in at least mode I (p. 79). The sockets are located between the cup holders in the tunnel console and on the rear side of the tunnel console (p. 140) for rear seat passengers.
G021439 G021440
Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.)
05
under armrest, AUX input/USB connec-
tor.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger, 12-volt socket (p. 140) and a small storage compartment.
Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 138)
12-volt socket in the front tunnel console
12-volt socket in the rear center console The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use. If both the front and rear sockets are used at the same time, the maximum current consumption per socket is 7.5A (90W). The auxiliary sockets can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Always keep the sockets covered when not in use.
Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 138) · 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)
140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Loading and storage
Glove compartment The glove compartment provides a lockable storage compartment for small items.
Vanity mirror The vanity mirrors are located on the upper side of the sun visors.
12-volt socket in the cargo area* The 12-volt socket can be used e.g., to connect the tire sealing system's compressor (certain models) and other 12-volt accessories.
G021438
The owner's manual and maps can be kept here. There are also holders for pens and fuel cards. The glove compartment can be locked manually with the key blade, see Locking/ unlocking glove compartment (p. 167). Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 138)
Vanity mirror with lighting The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted.
Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 138) · Bulbs vanity mirror lighting (p. 341)
05 Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket.
NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery.
Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 138) · Tunnel console 12-volt sockets (p. 140)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141
05 Loading and storage
Loading general
WARNING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is determined by factors such as the number of passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of any accessories that may be installed, etc.
· Stop the engine, put the gear selector
in P, and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects.
To increase loading space, the rear seat backrests can be folded down, see Rear seats folding backrest (p. 86).
· The vehicle's driving characteristics
may change depending on the weight and distribution of the load.
When loading the cargo area, keep the following in mind:
· Load objects in the cargo area against
the backrest whenever possible.
· Unstable loads can be secured to the
load anchoring eyelets with straps or web lashings to help keep them from shifting.
05
· Stop the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading or unloading long
· A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a
force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).
· The cargo area and rear seat should
not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain.
objects. The gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the vehicle in motion.
Related information
· Load anchoring eyelets (p. 143) · Steel cargo grid (p. 149)
· Loading roof load carriers (p. 142)
Loading roof load carriers
Using load carriers Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Observe the following points when in use:
· To avoid damaging your vehicle and to
achieve maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle.
· Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). For non-Volvo roof racks, check the manufacturer's weight limits for the rack.
· Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).
· Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.
· Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.
· Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-
ate tie-down equipment.
· Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured.
· Remember that the vehicle's center of
gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof.
142
05 Loading and storage
· The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel
consumption will increase with the size of the load.
· Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
cornering and hard braking.
Related information
· Loading general (p. 142) · Load anchoring eyelets (p. 143)
Load anchoring eyelets Certain models have rails on opposite sides of the cargo compartment's floor equipped with hooks for anchoring loads with straps, nets, etc. Other models have load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the vehicle.
Models with fixed eyelets
Models with moveable hooks
WARNING
The two upper hooks shown in the illustration are for holding grocery bags only. They are not intended for anchoring heavy objects.
WARNING
· Cover sharp edges on long loads to
help prevent injury to occupants.
Secure the load to help prevent shift-
05
ing during sudden stops.
· Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining
straps.
· Always secure the load to help prevent
it from moving in the event of sudden
stops.
· Switch off the engine, apply the park-
ing brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the
vehicle.
Related information
· Loading general (p. 142)
143
05 Loading and storage
Floor rails and hooks general information The floor of the cargo compartment has rails on opposite sides of the vehicle equipped with hooks for anchoring loads with straps, nets, etc.
Floor rails and hooks moving1
Related information
· Loading general (p. 142) · Floor rails and hooks inserting (p. 145) · Floor rails and hooks removing (p. 145)
G017742
05
Load secured in upper and lower hooks Cleaning the rails Dirt or other small objects that collect in the rails can make moving, locking, unlocking, and removing the hooks more difficult. Objects can be removed from the rails with a vacuum cleaner, and the rails can be cleaned with a moist cloth.
Related information
· Loading general (p. 142) · Floor rails and hooks inserting (p. 145)
To move a hook, fold it down in the direction in which its opening points. Press the hook down lightly and move it to the desired position. Fold up the hook. It will lock in place.
NOTE
There should be at least 2 in. (50 cm) between the hooks in the rail.
WARNING
Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle.
1 Models with moveable hooks only.
144
Floor rails and hooks removing3
05 Loading and storage
Related information
· Loading general (p. 142) · Floor rails and hooks inserting (p. 145) · Floor rails and hooks moving (p. 144)
Floor rails and hooks inserting
G018134 G019581
The load-securing hooks can easily be removed, for example, to clean the rail.
To remove a hook, fold it down in the direction in which its opening points. Press the hook down lightly and move the it to an opening in the rail. Pull the hook straight up. Replace a hook in the rail in the reverse order.
NOTE
In order to return a removed hook into a rail, it must be pressed down lightly.
3 Models with moveable hooks only.
Models with moveable hooks only: upper illustration: hooks correctly installed, Lower illustration: hooks incorrectly installed
It is important to insert the hooks correctly in
05
the rails. The hooks' openings should point
away from each other.
· The opening on the hook closest to the
rear seat backrest should point toward the backrest.
· The opening on the hook closest to the
tailgate should point toward the tailgate.
}} 145
05 Loading and storage
|| WARNING
The hooks must be installed correctly in the rail. Incorrectly installed hooks will be folded down by the strap, allowing them to move. The load will then no longer be securely anchored.
Straps for securing loads
Grocery bag holder The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in place.
05
Securing loads - models with moveable hooks Wrapping straps a full turn around the hooks helps keep them in place.
NOTE
The straps should preferably be approximately 1 in. (25 mm) in width.
G019397 G017745
Securing loads - models with fixed eyelets Related information
· Loading general (p. 142) · Floor rails and hooks removing (p. 145) · Floor rails and hooks moving (p. 144)
Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo area The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in place. 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo
area. 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.
Related information
· Loading general (p. 142)
146
Cargo net general information The cargo net helps protect passengers from objects in the cargo area in the event of a sudden stop or hard braking.
Attaching the cassette(s)
05 Loading and storage
Using the net(s)
G018246
Storage compartment for the cargo net Two cassettes containing nylon cargo nets are stored in a compartment under the cargo area floor.
The two-sections of the net are attached to the rear side of the rear seat backrest. The cassettes have different widths, and the widest section should be mounted on the right side (seen from the rear of the vehicle). 1. Fold down the rear seat backrests. 2. Align the cassette's mounting rail above
the mounting brackets on the backrest .
3. Slide the cassette onto the mounting brackets .
4. Return the backrest to the upright position.
05
}} 147
05 Loading and storage
|| With the backrests upright The net is pulled up from the cassette and locks in position after approximately 1 minute.
3. Slide the cassettes outward until they release from the mounting brackets. WARNING
the same procedure as for using the nets with the backrests upright.
Pull up the right side of the net by grasping its strap. Insert the net's rod in the retaining bracket on the right side near the ceiling and press it forward. It will click into place.
· When not in use, return the cassettes
to their storage compartment under the cargo area floor.
· Objects in the cargo area should be
securely anchored, even if the cargo net is correctly installed and in use.
Extend the left section of the rod and insert it in the bracket on the left side of the cargo compartment. Press it forward until it clicks into place.
Using the cargo net with the cargo area cover
Pull up the left side of the cargo net and
05
secure it on the rod.
NOTE
· The net can be fastened in the same
way if the rear seat backrests are folded down. In this case, use the retaining brackets near the ceiling, above the front seats.
· The front passenger's seat backrest
can also be folded down for carrying long objects.
Removing the cargo net cassettes 1. Retract the net(s) in the reverse order. 2. Fold the entire rear seat backrest down.
Straps for pulling up the net The cargo net(s) can also be pulled up from the backrest when the cargo area cover is pulled out. The straps for pulling up the cargo net are located at the arrows in the illustration. Follow
G018247
148
05 Loading and storage
Cargo area cover The cargo area cover can be used to conceal objects in the cargo area.
Use
· Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it
into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars.
· To retract (roll up) the cover, release it
from the holes and guide it toward the rear seat backrest. Installing the cover 1. Press the end piece on one side of the cargo area cover into the retaining bracket in the side panel of the cargo area . 2. Do the same on the opposite side .
G017749 G017748
3. Press both sides of the cover until they click into place . The red mark will no longer be visible.
4. Check that both ends of the cover are securely locked in place.
Steel cargo grid Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from moving forward into the passenger compartment.
Removing the cover 1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover
inward.
2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward. The other end will release automatically from its retaining bracket.
Folding down the cargo area cover's
rear flap
The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori-
zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled up). To fold it down:
05
Pull the flap slightly rearward past its supports and fold it down.
Folding the grid up/down Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it rearward/upward, or push it downward/
NOTE
forward.
On models equipped with this cover, it should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors. Related information
· Loading general (p. 142)
NOTE
If the steel grid is to be used with the optional cargo area cover, the grid must be folded down before the cargo area cover is put in place.
Installing the steel cargo grid In order to install the steel grid, the rear seat backrests must be completely folded down,
}} 149
G018367
05 Loading and storage
|| see Rear seats folding backrest (p. 86)for instructions.
NOTE · The steel cargo grid is easiest to install
by two people, and should be folded down.
· When installing the grid, the handle
should be on the front side of the grid (see illustrations ).
Put the handle in the installation position, see the illustration. Press lightly on the handle in order to turn it to this position, see the arrow.
05
Press in the piston toward the grid and press it into the attachment bracket near
the ceiling.
Turn the handle 90° . Press lightly as shown in illustration if necessary. Attach the grid by moving the handle 90°.
Do the same on the opposite side of the vehicle.
Installing the cargo grid Related information
· Cargo area cover (p. 149)
G018368
G018369
150
LOCKS AND ALARM
06 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Remote key loss
FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO
Two remote keys are provided with your vehi-
If either of the remote keys (p. 152) is lost, the
5WK49236
cle. They enable you to unlock the doors and tailgate, and also function as ignition keys to start the vehicle or operate electrical components. The remote keys contain detachable metal key blades for manually locking or unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment. The visible ends of these key blades are unique to make it easier to identify "your" remote key. Up to six remotes can be programmed for use on the same vehicle.
WARNING
Never leave the remote key in the ignition slot if children are to remain in the vehicle.
For more information on the various ignition
other should be taken with the vehicle to a Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost remote key must be erased from the system.
NOTE
Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any authorized Volvo retailer. You can also obtain additional or duplicate remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys. Each key must be programmed to work with your vehicle. California Only:
FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266 FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233 FCC ID:KR55WK49233 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canada-5WK49264 IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO 5WK49236
modes, see Ignition modes (p. 79).
Related information
06
· Remote key functions (p. 155)
· Remote key functions (p. 155)
A list of independent repair facilities and/or locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and code replacement keys can be found:
· on the Volvo website at
http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys
IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233 IC:267T-5WK49233
· Remote key range (p. 156)
· by calling Volvo Customer Care at
1-800-458-1552
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
The number of registered keys for the vehicle can be found by pressing MY CAR and going
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
into Settings Information Number of keys. For a description of the menu system, see My Car introduction (p. 76).
Related information
· Remote key functions (p. 155)
USA-5WK49264
152
06 Locks and alarm
Key memory The memory in the remote key makes it possible to store certain personal settings.
The position of the side door mirrors, power driver's seat* and the selected instrument panel theme1 are stored in the remote keys when the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's door is unlocked with the same remote key and the door is opened within 2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the doors were most recently locked with the same remote key. If the seat/mirrors have not been readjusted since the vehicle was locked, they will already be in the position stored in that particular remote key and will not move. For more information on this feature, see Front seats power seat (p. 81).
This feature can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and going into Settings Car settings Car key memory. For a description of the menu system, see My Car introduction (p. 76).
NOTE
If the vehicle is locked with the remote key or is left unlocked for more than 30 minutes, the key memory function will be deactivated. To reactivate the key's memory:
· Press the unlock button on the remote
key.
For information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive, see Keyless drive* locking/unlocking (p. 161). Related information
· Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 153)
Locking/unlocking confirmation Settings can be made in the menu system for audible and visual confirmation when the vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With these functions activated, the following will occur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked:
Locking confirmation
· The turn signals flash once, an audible
signal sounds and the door mirrors will fold* in. Confirmation will only be given when all doors and the tailgate are properly closed and locked.
NOTE
If you do not receive confirmation when locking the vehicle, check whether a door or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has been turned off in the menu.
Unlocking confirmation
06
· The turn signals will flash twice and the
door mirrors will fold* out.
1 Optional digital instrument panel only
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 153
06 Locks and alarm
|| Making a setting Different alternatives for locking/unlocking confirmation can be selected in the menus by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel.
· To activate visual confirmation: go to
Settings Car settings Light settings and select Door lock confirmation light and/or Unlock confirmation light by pressing OK/ MENU.
· To activate audible confirmation: go to
Settings Car settings Lock settings and select Audible confirmation by pressing OK/MENU. For a description of the menu system, see My Car introduction (p. 76).
Lock indicator
A flashing indicator light at the base of the windshield verifies that the vehicle is locked.
Related information
· Locking/unlocking from the outside
(p. 165)
· Locking/unlocking from inside (p. 166) · Locking/unlocking tailgate (p. 168)
06
Immobilizer (start inhibitor) The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps prevent unauthorized persons from starting the engine.
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle contains a coded transponder. The code in the key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition slot where it is compared to the code stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start only with a properly coded key. If you misplace a key, take the other keys to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure. The following messages (which may appear in the instrument panel display) are related to the immobilizer:
Lock/alarm indicator light
154
06 Locks and alarm
Message Insert car key Car key not found
Immobilizer Try start again
Meaning Remote key not recognized during start. Try to start the vehicle again. Vehicles with keyless drive* only. Remote key not recognized during start. Try to start the vehicle again. If the problem continues, insert the remote key into the ignition slot and try to start the vehicle again. Remote key fault during start. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
CAUTION
Never use force when inserting the remote key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot be started if the transponder is damaged.
USAFCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following condition: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation. CanadaIC: 3659A-WFS125VO Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. For information on starting the vehicle, see Starting the engine (p. 246).
Remote key functions The remote key is used e.g., to unlock the doors and start the engine.
Remote key Lock
Unlock
Approach lighting
Tailgate unlock
06
Panic alarm
Buttons on the remote Lock Press the Lock button on the
remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate. The turn signals will flash once to confirm locking.
Unlock Press the Unlock button on the remote once to unlock the driver's door.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 155
06 Locks and alarm
||
After a short pause, press the Unlock button a second time within 10 seconds to unlock the other doors and the tailgate. This function can be changed so that all doors unlock at the same time by pressing
NOTE
As an added safety precaution, the parking lights will come on automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been opened.
Remote key range The remote key has a range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.
NOTE
My Car and going to Settings Car settings Lock settings Change doors unlock setting. For a description of the menu system, see My Car introduction (p. 76).
Approach lighting As you approach the vehicle, press the button on the remote key to light the interior lighting, parking lights, license plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*.
These lights will switch off automatically after
After closing, the tailgate will not automatically relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the alarm.
For information on opening the tailgate from the passenger compartment, see Locking/ unlocking tailgate (p. 168)
Panic alarm This button can be used to attract attention during emergency situations.
Buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of the remote key. The vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with the key blade, see Alarm-related functions (p. 173). If the remote key is removed from the vehicle while the engine is running or if the ignition is in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel display and there will be an audible signal.
30, 60 or 90 seconds. For a description of the menu system, see My Car introduction (p. 76).
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and
06
Unlock tailgate Press the button twice within several seconds to disarm the alarm system (the alarm indicator light on the dash-
horn will be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
board will go out), and unlock only the tail-
To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds
gate.
and press the button again.
When the remote key is returned to the vehicle, the message will be erased and the audible signal will stop after one of the following has been done:
· The remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot
· The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h)
Pressing this button for several seconds also opens the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate.
The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehicle. Related information
· Locking/unlocking from inside (p. 166)
· The OK button on the left steering wheel
lever is pressed Related information
· Remote key functions (p. 155)
· Locking/unlocking from the outside
(p. 165)
· Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 153)
156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
Detachable key blade general information Each remote key contains a detachable metal key blade (p. 152) for mechanically locking or unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment, and to enable the private locking(p. 158) function. For more information on the key blade. The key blades have a unique code, which is used if new ones need to be produced. This code is available at an authorized Volvo retailer.
The visible ends of these key blades are unique to make it easier to identify "your" remote key.
Detachable key blade detaching/ reinserting The detachable key blade (p. 157) can be removed or reinserted in the remote key as follows:
Removing the key blade
Related information
· Detachable key blade unlocking
(p. 158)
· Child safety locks (p. 61)
Related information
· Detachable key blade unlocking
(p. 158)
· Detachable key blade detaching/rein-
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
serting (p. 157)
Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key.
06
Reinserting the blade 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.
2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place.
157
06 Locks and alarm
Detachable key blade unlocking Your vehicle's remote key (p. 152) contains a metal, detachable key blade that can be used to unlock the driver's door, lock the glove compartment, etc.
3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the alarm.
4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This also applies to vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive.
5. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked.
Related information
· Remote key and key blade (p. 152) · Remote key replacing the battery
(p. 159)
Private locking By utilizing the remote key with the key blade removed, the private locking feature enables you to block access to the glove compartment and disconnect the tailgate from the central locking system for e.g., valet parking or when the vehicle is brought to the retailer for service.
G017869
Driver's door keyhole cover
If the remote key does not function normally
(weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be
06
unlocked with the detachable key blade.
1. Remove the detachable key
blade (p. 157) from the remote key.
2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover. > The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward.
Normal locking/unlocking points
158
06 Locks and alarm
Activating the private locking function
Remote key replacing the battery The remote key can be opened if the battery needs to be replaced.
The battery should be replaced if:
· The information symbol illuminates and
Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries. is shown in the display and/or
· if the locks do not react after several
attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.
G017870
Locking/unlocking points with private locking activated.
NOTE
With the private locking function activated:
· The vehicle's doors can be locked or
unlocked with the remote
· The engine can be started · The glove compartment cannot be
unlocked
· The tailgate cannot be unlocked or
opened with the remote
Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock. Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise. Remove the key blade from the lock. A message will appear in the instrument panel display.
Deactivating the private locking
The remote key's range is normally approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.
06
· The rear floor hatch cannot be opened
function Turn the key blade 180 degrees counter-
NOTE
The floor hatch must be closed completely before the tailgate can be closed.
clockwise in the glove compartment lock to deactivate private locking. For information on locking the glove compartment normally, without activating the private
locking function, see Locking/unlocking the
glove compartment (p. 167).
}} 159
06 Locks and alarm
|| Opening the remote key
06 The remote key has one CR 2430, 3V battery only
To open the remote key
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key.
Insert a small screwdriver in the hole behind the spring loaded catch and carefully pry up the cover. Turn the remote key with the buttons upward so that the battery does not fall out when the cover is removed. Inserting a new battery
CAUTION
When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key.
Note the position of the battery's (+) or () sides. 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-
tery. 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side down-
ward. Closing the remote key 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.
3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries used in the remote control meet the UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. Batteries installed in the key from the factory and batteries exchanged by an authorized Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria. Old batteries should be disposed of properly at a recycling center or at your Volvo retailer.
Related information
· Remote key functions (p. 155)
160
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* locking/unlocking This system makes it possible to unlock and lock the vehicle without having to press any buttons on the remote key. It is only necessary to have a keyless drive remote key in your possession to operate the central locking system.
Both of the remote keys provided with the vehicle have the keyless function, and additional ones can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six remote keys. The red rings in the illustration indicate the area around the vehicle that is within range of the keyless drive antennas. Locking the vehicle
Unlocking the vehicle
· A keyless drive remote key must be on
the same side of the vehicle as the door to be opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tailgate (see the shaded areas in the illustration).
· Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or pull the tailgate opening control. The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the vehicle's menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry. For a description of the menu system, see My Car introduction (p. 76).
Related information
· Alarm indicator (p. 171)
Range of the keyless drive remote key5 ft
(1.5 meters)
NOTE
Models with keyless drive have a button on the outside door handles The doors and the tailgate can be locked by
06
· The gear selector must in the P posi-
pressing the lock button in any of the outside
tion before the vehicle can be locked
door handles.
and the alarm can be armed.
· The buttons on the keyless drive
remote key can also be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. For more information, see Remote key and key blade (p. 152).
NOTE
On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* unlocking with key blade If the remote key does not function normally (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade.
4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This also applies to vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive.
5. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked.
Related information
· Keyless drive* locking/unlocking (p. 161) · Alarm general information (p. 171)
Keyless drive* key memory When you leave the vehicle with a remote key in your possession and lock any door, the
Driver's door keyhole cover
1. Remove the key blade from the remote
key (see Detachable key blade detach-
06
ing/reinserting (p. 157) for instructions).
2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover.
> The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward.
3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the alarm.
162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
position of the driver's seat2 and door mirrors will be stored in the remote key's memory. The next time a door is opened by a person with the same remote key in his/her possession, the driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the door was most recently locked.
NOTE
If several people carrying remote keys approach the vehicle at the same time, the driver's seat and door mirrors will assume the positions they were in for the person who opens the driver's door.
See also power seats (p. 81) for information on adjusting and storing the seat's position in the seat memory.
NOTE
If the vehicle is locked by pressing the button on one of the door handles or by pressing the lock button on the remote key, or if it is left unlocked for more than 30 minutes, the key memory function will be deactivated. To reactivate the key's memory:
· Unlock the vehicle by pulling a door
handle with the remote key in your possession or by pressing the unlock button on the remote key.
Related information
· Keyless drive* locking/unlocking (p. 161) · Remote key functions (p. 155)
Keyless drive* messages If all of the remote keys are removed from the vehicle while the engine is running or if the ignition modes (p. 79) is in mode II and all of the doors are closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel display and an audible signal will sound.
When at least one remote key has been returned to the car, the message will be erased in the display and the audible signal will stop when:
· A door has been opened and closed · The remote key has been inserted in the
ignition slot
· The OK button has been pressed. For the
location of this button, see Information display menu controls (p. 112)
06
2 Power seats only
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 163
06 Locks and alarm
CAUTION
· Keyless drive remote keys should
never be left in the vehicle. In the event of a break-in, a remote found in the vehicle could make it possible to start the engine.
· Electromagnetic fields or metal
obstructions can interfere with the keyless drive system. The remote key should never be placed closer than approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to cell phones, metallic objects or e.g., stored in a metal briefcase.
For Automobile Use Canada IC:267T-5WK48952, 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 NOTE This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION
Keyless drive* antenna locations The keyless drive system has a number of antennas located at various points in the vehicle.
USA FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964 NOTE
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
06
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
On the tailgate, near the wiper motor
Left rear door handle
Under the floor of the cargo area, near the rear seat Right rear door handle
Under the rear section of the center console Under the front section of the center console
Siemens VDO
5WK48891
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system.
Related information
· Keyless drive* locking/unlocking (p. 161)
Locking/unlocking from the outside The remote key (p. 152) is used to lock/unlock all of the doors and the tailgate at the same time. Different settings for unlocking the vehicle can be selected, see Remote key functions (p. 155).
Before the vehicle can be locked from the outside with the remote key, the driver's door must be closed. If the tailgate or any other door is open, it will be locked and the alarm will be armed.
In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade (p. 158). Related information
· Locking/unlocking from inside (p. 166)
NOTE
Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must
be closed before the vehicle can be locked.
06
The first press on the unlock button unlocks
the driver's door and a second press unlocks
the other doors and the tailgate (see also
remote key and key blade (p. 152)). This set-
ting can be changed in the menu system. See
MY CAR (p. 76) for a description.
If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to replace the battery in the remote, see Remote key replacing the battery (p. 159).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165
06 Locks and alarm
Manual locking In certain situations (e.g., if there is no electrical current in the vehicle), the doors can be locked manually.
The detachable key blade (p. 157) can be used in the lock cylinder in the driver's door to lock that door. The other doors do not have lock cylinders and the slot on the rear edge of each door has to be used to lock it. This will lock the door from the outside but it can still be opened from inside the vehicle. To do so:
In the horizontal position, the door cannot be opened from the outside. In the vertical position, the door can be opened from the inside and the outside.
NOTE
If the manual child safety lock (p. 61) is activated for a rear side door and that door is also locked manually, the door cannot be opened from the outside or inside. The door can only be unlocked with the remote key or the central locking button.
Related information
· Remote key replacing the battery
(p. 159)
Locking/unlocking from inside The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. Press to lock and
to unlock.
From inside the vehicle (central locking button)
06 Manually locking a door Insert the key blade into the slot and turn it 90 degrees to lock that door (the slot in a particular door locks that door only).
166
Central locking button
The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. Press to lock and
to unlock.
Unlocking The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the vehicle in two ways:
· By pressing the unlock button . · The door can be unlocked by pulling the
door handle once and opened by pulling the handle again.
06 Locks and alarm
Locking
· Press the lock button
after the front
doors have been closed.
· Each door can be locked individually with
the lock button on the respective doors.
The door must be closed first.
Alternative locking when parking The central locking button on the driver's door can also be used to lock the vehicle when you leave it. To do so:
1. Open the door.
2. Press the lock section of the button.
3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle completely and arm the alarm.
Automatic locking When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and tailgate can be locked automatically. This feature can be turned on or off by pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings Lock settings Automatic door locking.
Related information
· Locking/unlocking from the outside
(p. 165)
· Alarm general information (p. 171) · Remote key functions (p. 155)
Locking/unlocking glove compartment The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the detachable key blade in the remote key. For information on removing the key blade from the remote key, see Detachable key blade detaching/reinserting (p. 157).
NOTE
Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the remote key in the passenger compartment. To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by pressing the lock button on the remote key. If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button, be sure that the remote key is in your possession before closing the door.
Insert the key blade in the glove compart-
06
ment lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
Remove the key blade from the lock.
Automatic relocking If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened.
167
06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking tailgate The tailgate can be opened, locked and unlocked in several ways.
NOTE
· If the doors are locked while the tail-
gate is open, the tailgate will remain unlocked until the vehicle is relocked by pressing the Lock button on the remote key.
· On keyless drive vehicles, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked.
Tailgate unlock button on the remote key
Unlocking the tailgate from the driver's seat
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
key
Press the tailgate unlock button on the
remote key to unlock (but not open3) the
06
tailgate. See Remote key and key
blade (p. 152) for more information.
> The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the alarm is not monitoring the entire vehicle.
Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to unlock (but not open4) the tailgate.
NOTE
The taillights will illuminate automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been opened.
Locking the tailgate with the remote key Press the lock button ( ) on the remote. See also (p. 152). The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and that the alarm has been armed. Opening that tailgate manually The tailgate is held closed by an electronic locking mechanism. To open: 1. 2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate.
CAUTION
Related information
· Locking/unlocking from inside (p. 166) · Locking/unlocking from the outside
(p. 165)
3 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (p. 169). 4 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (p. 169).
168
06 Locks and alarm
Power tailgate automatic opening/ closing The power tailgate can be opened/closed using a button on the lighting panel or on the remote key.
Automatic opening The power tailgate can be opened automatically in the three ways:
· By pressing and holding the
but-
ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate
begins to open.
· By pressing and holding the
but-
ton on the remote key until the tailgate
begins to open.
· By pressing the rubber-covered button
under the outer handle on the tailgate.
The taillights illuminate automatically when the automatic open function is used.
CAUTION
Be sure that there is adequate space above and behind the vehicle before opening the tailgate automatically. The vehicle should not be driven or moved with the tailgate in the open position. However, if the vehicle is moved with the tailgate in the open position, the automatic closing function will be inoperative until one of the following occurs:
· The tailgate is closed manually · The ignition is switched off and the key
is removed for approximately 10 minutes (the tailgate will function again after restart).
NOTE
If the tailgate has been opened and closed continuously too long, the automatic function will be deactivated to avoid overloading the electrical system. The automatic function can be used again after approximately 2 minutes. If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or disconnected, or if the tailgate has been open for more than 24 hours, the tailgate must be opened and closed once manually to reset the system.
Automatic closing The power tailgate can be closed by pressing
the
-button on the tailgate (see the
illustration) or by pressing it down.
WARNING
Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when it is opened or closed automatically. The tailgate should never be obstructed in any way when it is operated.
Related information
· Locking/unlocking tailgate (p. 168)
06
169
06 Locks and alarm
Power tailgate programming The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be programmed, which can be useful, for example, if the tailgate has to be opened in a garage with a low ceiling.
To do so:
· Open the tailgate manually, hold it at the
desired maximum opening angle and press the tailgate's closing button for at least 3 seconds. When the tailgate is released, programming is complete.
· To remove this programming, open the
tailgate manually to a higher opening angle and press the tailgate's closing button for at least 3 seconds.
Power tailgate interruption Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can be interrupted in four ways:
· By pressing the
lighting panel.
button on the
· By pressing the
remote key.
button on the
· By pressing the button on the lower edge
of the tailgate.
· By pressing the rubber-covered button
under the outer handle on the tailgate.
If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate will stop moving.
Power tailgate manual opening/ closing The power tailgate can be disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system.
This is done by quickly pulling the outer handle twice. The tailgate can then be opened/ closed manually.
Related information
· Locking/unlocking tailgate (p. 168)
Related information
· Locking/unlocking tailgate (p. 168)
Pinch protection If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being operated, the pinch protection function is activated.
06
· If the tailgate is being opened, the electri-
cal function will be switched off and the
tailgate will stop.
· If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop
and move slightly in the opposite direc-
tion.
Related information
· Locking/unlocking tailgate (p. 168)
170
Alarm general information The alarm system provides a warning if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle. The alarm is automatically armed (p. 172) whenever the vehicle is locked with the remote key. When armed, the alarm continuously monitors a number of points on the vehicle. The following conditions will trigger the alarm:
· The hood is forced open. · The tailgate is forced open. · A door is forced open. · The ignition slot is tampered with. · An attempt is made to start the vehicle
with a non-approved key (a key not coded to the car's ignition).
· The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).
· The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed. A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle.
Related information
· Alarm turning off (p. 173) · Alarm signal (p. 172) · Alarm indicator (p. 171)
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm indicator The status of the alarm system is indicated by the red indicator light on the dashboard (see illustration):
· Indicator light off: the alarm is not
armed (p. 172)
· The indicator light flashes at one-second
intervals: the alarm is armed
· The indicator light flashes rapidly before
06
the remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot and the ignition is put in mode I: the
alarm has been triggered.
Related information
· Alarm general information (p. 171) · Alarm turning off (p. 173) · Alarm signal (p. 172)
171
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm arming/disarming The alarm system provides a warning if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
Arming the alarm Press the Lock button on the remote key.
One long flash of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm (p. 171) is armed.
Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in MY CAR, under Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry. For a description of the menu system, see My Car introduction (p. 76).
Disarming the alarm Press the Unlock button on the remote
key. > Two short flashes from the car's direc-
tion indicators confirm that the alarm has been deactivated and that all doors are unlocked.
Related information
· Alarm indicator (p. 171) · Alarm signal (p. 172) · Alarm turning off (p. 173) · Alarm-related functions (p. 173)
Alarm signal An audible (p. 171) signal is given by a battery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds.
The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
Related information
· Alarm indicator (p. 171) · Alarm arming/disarming (p. 172) · Alarm turning off (p. 173)
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
06
tion.
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
This device is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
172
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm turning off The alarm system provides a warning if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle. If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by pressing the Unlock button on the remote key or by inserting the remote key in the ignition slot. Two short flashes from the car's turn signals confirm that the alarm has been turned off.
Related information
· Alarm indicator (p. 171) · Alarm arming/disarming (p. 172) · Remote key replacing the battery
(p. 159)
Alarm-related functions The following is general information regarding the alarm system in your vehicle.
Automatic re-arming If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically re-engage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened.
Remote key not functioning If the remote key is not functioning properly, the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. > This will trigger the alarm.
Related information
· Detachable key blade unlocking (p. 158) · Detachable key blade general informa-
tion (p. 157)
· Starting the engine (p. 246)
06
2. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key into the ignition slot (also on vehicles with the optional keyless drive).
3. Start the engine.
173
DRIVER SUPPORT
07 Driver support
Active chassis* (Four C) Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the vehicle's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.
Operation
Comfort Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the button will be on when this mode is selected.
Sport In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is reduced during cornering and steering response is more immediate. The transmission shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has been selected.
Stability system introduction The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system consists of a number of functions designed to help reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding and to generally help improve directional stability.
A pulsating sound will be audible when the system is actively operating and is normal. Acceleration will also be slightly slower than normal.
WARNING
ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot deal with all situations or road conditions.
Advanced In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal and steering response is very direct. Gear shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for dynamic and active driving.
The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner in accordance with current traffic regulations. ESC consists of the following functions:
Chassis settings Use the buttons in the center console to change setting. The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated the next time the engine is started.
NOTE
This system is available on Canadian models only.
Related information
· Adjustable steering force* (p. 179)
· Traction control
· Spin control
· Active Yaw Control
· Trailer Stability Assist
Traction Control (TC)
07
This function is designed to help reduce wheel spin at low speeds by transferring power from a drive wheel that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 175
07 Driver support
|| Spin Control (SC) The SC function is designed to help prevent the drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating. Active Yaw Control (AYC) This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)1 The TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway. See Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 283) for more information.
This system is automatically deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.
Related information
· Stability system operation (p. 176) · Stability system symbols and messages
(p. 177)
· Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 283)
Stability system operation
Operation Sport mode The stability system is always activated and cannot be switched off.
However, the driver can select Sport mode, which offers more active driving characteristics. Sport mode can be selected in the MY CAR menus, see My Car introduction (p. 76). In Sport mode, the engine management system monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by allowing more lateral movement of the rear wheels before ESC is activated. Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use Sport mode for maximum tractive force.
is switched off. ETC will return to normal mode when the engine is restarted. Related information
· Stability system introduction (p. 175) · Stability system symbols and messages
(p. 177)
07
If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator pedal, ETC will also activate to help sta-
bilize the vehicle.
To switch to Sport mode:
Sport mode remains active until the driver switches it off in the menu or until the engine
1 Included when a Volvo trailer hitch is installed
176
07 Driver support
Stability system symbols and messages
Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel A text message can be erased by pressing briefly the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol Message ESC Temporarily OFF
Description The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required "Message"
The ESC system is not functioning properly.
· Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. · If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-
shop to have the system inspected.
Read the message in the instrument panel.
and
07
Steady glow for 2 seconds.
The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.
}} 177
07 Driver support
|| Symbol Message Flashing symbol.
Description ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.
Steady glow.
Sport mode has been activated. Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.
Related information
· Stability system introduction (p. 175) · Stability system operation (p. 176)
07
178
07 Driver support
Adjustable steering force* Steering force increases with the speed of the vehicle to give the driver enhanced sense of control and stability. At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc.
Adjustable steering force* Steering force can be changed under MY CAR Car settings Steering wheel force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, My Car introduction (p. 76).
Road Sign Information (RSI)* introduction RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road signs with the posted speed limit.
Introduction
Related information
· Road Sign Information (RSI) operation
(p. 180)
· Road Sign Information (RSI) limitations
(p. 180)
NOTE
This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in motion.
Examples of readable road signs
NOTE
If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed limit, this will be displayed in the center
In certain situations, the power steering
console.
may become too warm and will have to be
temporarily cooled down. While this is happening, the power steering effect will
WARNING
be reduced slightly and somewhat more
RSI does not function in all situations and
effort may be required to turn the steering wheel.
is only intended to provide supplementary information.
07
If this occurs, a message will be displayed in the instrument panel.
The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle safely.
Related information
· Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 175)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179
07 Driver support
Road Sign Information (RSI) operation
Displaying the speed limit indication can be deactivated. To do so:
Road Sign Information (RSI) limitations
Speed limit information When RSI registers a road sign showing the speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol on the instrument panel.
Settings in MY CAR
· Deselect the alternative in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Road Sign Information or cancel by pressing EXIT. Speed alert The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle exceeds the posted speed limit by more than 3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the symbol with the posted speed limit in the instrument panel begins to flash.
To activate speed alert:
· Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Speed alert or cancel by pressing EXIT.
Related information
· Road Sign Information (RSI)* introduc-
tion (p. 179)
· Road Sign Information (RSI) limitations
(p. 180)
· My Car introduction (p. 76)
RSI's camera has the same limitations as the human eye. See The camera's limitations (p. 217) for more information about the camera's limitations. Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit (such as a sign with a town's name and the permitted speed limit) will not be registered by RSI. Other factors that may interfere with RSI include:
· Faded signs · Signs located in a curve · Twisted or damaged signs · Obstructed signs · Signs that are partially covered by snow,
ice, etc.
Related information
· Road Sign Information (RSI)* introduc-
tion (p. 179)
· Road Sign Information (RSI) operation
07
(p. 180)
· The camera's limitations (p. 217)
Possible settings in MY CAR
180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Cruise control (CC) introduction Cruise control is designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads.
Operation
Related information
· Cruise control (CC) engaging and set-
ting speed (p. 181)
· Cruise control (CC) deactivating
(p. 183)
Cruise control (CC) engaging and setting speed Cruise control is designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads.
Engaging the cruise control function
Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Standby mode
Resume set speed
Deactivating
Activate/set speed Selected speed (gray symbol indicates standby mode) Cruise control active: white symbol (gray symbol indicates standby mode)
Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Standby mode
Resume set speed
Deactivating
07
Activate/set speed
Selected speed (gray symbol indicates standby mode) Cruise control active: white symbol (gray symbol indicates standby mode)
}} 181
07 Driver support
|| Before a speed can be set, the cruise control system must be engaged (put in standby mode).
Press the CRUISE button (1).
Adjusting the set speed After a speed has been set, it can be
increased or decreased by using the or buttons.
Related information
· Cruise control (CC) introduction (p. 181) · Cruise control (CC) deactivating
(p. 183)
> The symbol illuminates and the text (---) mph (5) indicates that cruise control is in standby mode.
1. Press or briefly and release the button to increase or decrease vehicle speed by approximately 1 mph or 1 km/h.
NOTE
> This will become the set speed when the button is released.
Putting cruise control in standby mode does not set a cruising speed.
2. Press and hold one of these buttons to increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or
1-km/h increments. Release the button
Setting a speed Use the or buttons set the vehicle's
when you have reached the desired speed.
current speed. The set speed is shown in the display.
NOTE
NOTE
· A temporary increase in speed by
pressing the accelerator pedal, for less
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).
than 1 minute (e.g. when passing another car), does not affect the current cruise control setting. The vehicle
will automatically return to the previ-
ously set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
07
· If one of the cruise control buttons is
kept depressed for more than approx.
1 minute cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off
in order to reset cruise control.
182
Toggling between ACC and CC (standard Cruise Control) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) helps the driver maintain a safe distance/time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Switching from ACC to CC This may be useful if, for example, the radar sensor is obstructed in some way. See Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193) for additional information.
· Press and hold the button; the symbol
in the instrument panel will switch from to .
> This activates the standard cruise control function (see Cruise control (CC) introduction (p. 181)).
WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that:
· Your vehicle will no longer automati-
cally maintain a set distance to a vehicle ahead.
· Only the set speed will be maintained
and the driver will have to apply the brakes when needed.
Switching from CC to ACC Switch off cruise control by pressing once or twice as needed according to the instructions in the previous section "Turning ACC off
completely." The next time the system is switched on, ACC will be reactivated.
Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
· Adaptive Cruise Control function
(p. 185)
07 Driver support
Cruise control (CC) deactivating Cruise control is designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads.
Automatic deactivation The cruise control is automatically deactivated temporarily if one of the following occurs:
· If the speed drops below approximately
20 mph (30 km/h).
· When the brake pedal is depressed. · If the gear selector is moved to position
N.
· During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. · If the vehicle's speed is increased by
using the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute.
· Engine speed (rpm) is too high or too low.
The currently set speed will be saved in the system's memory.
Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate the
07
cruise control by pressing 0. The saved
speed is shown in brackets in the information
display.
}} 183
07 Driver support
|| Resume set speed If the cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing
. The vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set speed.
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control introduction ACC is an optional system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads.
There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed.
When the driver has set the desired speed and the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC functions as follows:
Deactivation The Cruise control is disengaged by pressing
· If there are no other vehicles in the lane
ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the set speed.
or by switching off the engine. The set
· If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower
speed is cleared.
moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys-
tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to
WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed on steep downgrades.
help maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead. When there are no longer slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to resume the set speed. If ACC is switched off completely or in
Related information
· Cruise control (CC) introduction (p. 181)
standby mode and your vehicle comes too close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will be warned by the Distance Alert system (see
07
· Cruise control (CC) engaging and set-
Distance Alert introduction (p. 198)).
ting speed (p. 181)
WARNING
· Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The "Function" section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using this feature.
· This system is designed to be a sup-
plementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.
· Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician.
184
07 Driver support
Operation
Controls and display Resume previous settings. Off/On/Standby mode Decrease/increase time interval Put in active mode and set a speed (each additional press increases/decreases speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h)) Set speed (shown in green when active, shown in white when in standby mode) Time interval ACC active (green symbol) or in standby mode (white symbol)
Related information
· Toggling between ACC and CC (standard
Cruise Control) (p. 183)
· Cruise control (CC) introduction (p. 181)
· Adaptive Cruise Control troubleshooting
(p. 197)
· Adaptive Cruise Control symbols and
messages (p. 195)
· Adaptive Cruise Control setting time
interval (p. 189)
· Adaptive Cruise Control setting speed
(p. 188)
· Radar sensor (p. 193) · Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Queue
Assist (p. 191)
· Adaptive Cruise Control passing
another vehicle (p. 191)
· Adaptive Cruise Control limitations
(p. 193)
· Adaptive Cruise Control function
(p. 185)
· Adaptive Cruise Control engaging
(p. 187)
· Adaptive Cruise Control deactivating
(p. 189)
Adaptive Cruise Control function Function
Function overview2 Warning light, braking by driver required
Controls in steering wheel
Radar sensor in front grille
Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:
· A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed
· A system to maintain a set distance to the
vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a
07
time interval. For example, you can
choose to remain approximately 2 sec-
onds behind the vehicle ahead. The
actual distance required to maintain a
2-second interval will vary according the
speed of the vehicles.
}} 185
07 Driver support
||
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
· Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-
sion avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle.
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive cruise control system modulates the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal.
When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode or is switched off completely, the brakes will not be modulated automatically. The driver must assume full control over the vehicle.
· Adaptive Cruise Control does not react
to people or animals, or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does not react to slow moving,
The ACC system is designed to smoothly regulate speed. However, the driver must apply the brakes in situations that require immediate braking. This applies when there
Warning light--driver braking required Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force that is equivalent to approximately 40% of
parked or approaching vehicles, or
are great differences in speed between vehi-
the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situa-
stationary objects.
cles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.
tions requiring more brake force than ACC
· Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding
WARNING
Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all, see Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193).
can provide and if the driver does not apply the brakes, an audible signal from the Collision Warning system will sound and warning light will illuminate (see Collision warning* function (p. 211)) in the windshield to alert the driver to react.
roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active
NOTE
The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehicle's speed is regulated by accelerating and braking. The brakes may emit a
mode at any permitted speed. However, if the vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC disengages (goes into standby mode) and will no longer modulate the brakes. The
07
sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system. This is normal.
driver will then have to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
2 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model
186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control engaging
NOTE
Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193). In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary.
Steep inclines and/or heavy loads ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level roads. The system may have difficulty maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situations, the driver should always be prepared to apply the brakes if necessary.
Putting ACC in standby mode Before ACC can be used to regulate speed and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must first be put in standby mode.
To do so:
The driver's door must be closed and the driver's seat belt must be fastened before ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's door is opened, ACC will return to standby mode. Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
Controls and display Off/On/Standby mode
· Press (2).
> The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in
the instrument panel to indicate that ACC
is in standby mode.
07
187
07 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control setting speed
Setting a speed Once ACC has been put in standby mode:
that vehicle.
This symbol indicates that you are approaching a vehicle ahead. ACC will switch from maintaining a set speed to maintaining a set distance from
When this happens, a speed range will be indicated on the speedometer: The higher speed (the currently set speed (5)) will be marked in green.
NOTE
· If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control
buttons is pressed for more than approximately one minute, ACC will be deactivated. The engine must then be switched off and restarted to reset ACC.
· In some situations Adaptive Cruise
Control cannot be put in active mode. Cruise control Unavailable is shown in the display, see Adaptive Cruise Control symbols and messages (p. 195).
The lower speed in the range is the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
Controls and display
Put in active mode and set a speed (each additional press increases/decreases speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))
· Press or (4).
Changing the set speed
· After a speed has been set, it can be
increased or decreased by briefly pressing the or buttons. Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph or 5 km/h. If the
(p. 184)
> The set speed, for example 60 mph (5),
speed is increased by pressing the accel-
will be magnified for several seconds and
erator pedal, the vehicle's speed when
the frame around the speed will change
the button is pressed will be set.
07
colors from white to green to indicate
· Press and hold one of these buttons to
that this speed has been stored (set).
increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or
When this symbol has changed colors from white to green, ACC is in active mode and the vehicle will
1-km/h increments. Release the button when you have reached the desired speed.
maintain the set speed.
188
07 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control setting time interval Setting a time interval
Different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the instrument panel3 as 15 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. One bar represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.
Adaptive Cruise Control deactivating
Standby mode (temporary deactivation) To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in standby mode):
To set/change a time interval:
· Press the / buttons (3).
Controls and display Decrease/increase time interval
At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations.
The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be
increased by pressing and decreased by
pressing . The current time interval is shown briefly in the display following adjustment.
WARNING · Only use a time interval that is suitable
in current traffic conditions.
· A short time interval gives the driver
limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic.
Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
Controls and display Resume previous settings.
Off/On/Standby mode
· Press
(2).
This symbol and the marking for the set
speed with change colors from green to
07
white.
The previously set speed and time interval are resumed by pressing (1).
3 The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see Distance Alert introduction (p. 198)) is activated
}} 189
07 Driver support
|| WARNING
The vehicle may accelerate quickly after has been pressed if its current speed is
considerably lower than the set speed.
Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the instrument panel. The driver must then intervene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead.
Turning ACC off completely
An automatic switch to standby mode may be
Standby mode due to action by the
caused if:
driver ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode:
· if the brakes are applied · if the gear selector is moved to N · if the driver drives faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.
In this happens, the driver will have to regulate the vehicle's speed.
· engine speed (rpm) is too high/low · The driver's door is opened · The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt · the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph
(30 km/h)
· the wheels lose traction · brake temperature is high · the radar sensor is obstructed by, for
example, wet snow or rain.
Controls and display Resume previous settings.
Off/On/Standby mode
· From standby mode, press (2)
once.
NOTE
Resuming the set speed
· From active mode, press (2) twice.
If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for a short time, such as when passing another vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and is reactivated when the pedal is released.
If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactiva-
ted by pressing the button on the steering wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the most recently set speed.
The set speed and time interval are then cleared from the system's memory and cannot be resumed by pressing (1) .
Related information
07 Automatic standby mode ACC is linked to other systems such as the stability system. If this system is not functioning properly, ACC will switch off automati-
WARNING
The vehicle may accelerate quickly after has been pressed if its current speed is
considerably lower than the set speed.
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
cally.
In the event of automatic deactivation, an audible signal will sound and the message
190
07 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control passing
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Enhanced speed interval
another vehicle
Queue Assist
Passing another vehicle If your vehicle's speed is being regulated by ACC and the driver indicates that he/she would like to pass the vehicle ahead by using the left turn signal, ACC can assist by accelerating briefly.
Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is linked to your vehicle's automatic transmission.
Introduction Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-
NOTE
The driver's door must be closed and the driver's seat belt must be fastened before ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's door is opened, ACC will return to standby mode.
This function is active at speeds above
sion.
approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
Queue Assist consists of the following func-
Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval
tions:
to the vehicle ahead at any permissible
WARNING
· Enhanced speed interval (including when
speed, including a complete stop.
Please be aware that this function will also cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in certain situations other than passing another vehicle, for example using the left turn signal to indicate a lane change or a turn toward a highway exit at speeds above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
the vehicle is at a complete stop or is
In order to activate ACC at speeds below
moving at speed below 18 mph
18 mph (30 km/h):
(30 km/h))
· Automatic standby mode when ACC
changes target vehicles
· The vehicle ahead must be within a rea-
sonable distance (not farther away than approx. 100 ft/30 meters)
· No automatic braking when at a standstill
· The lowest speed that can be selected is
· The parking brake is applied automati-
18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also
cally
help maintain the set time interval to the
Please note that the lowest speed that can be set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can
vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a complete stop.
maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist consists of the following features:
During short stops (less than approximately
3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle will begin moving again automatically as
07
soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move.
If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically go into standby mode.
}} 191
07 Driver support
||
The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in
The following only applies at speeds below This happens if:
one of the following ways:
· By pressing · By accelerating up to at least 3 mph
(4 km/h). ACC will then resume following the vehicle ahead. Your vehicle will then resume following the vehicle ahead at the set time interval.
NOTE
ACC can remain active and keep your vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake will be engaged and ACC will go into standby mode. To reactivate ACC, the driver must release the parking brake (see Parking brake general information (p. 268)).
Automatic standby mode when ACC changes target vehicles
07
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h): If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that the radar sensor has detected) from a moving vehicle to a stationary one, the system will apply the brakes in your vehicle.
WARNING
At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC will not react to a stationary vehicle and apply the brakes but will instead accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver must actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle.
ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if:
· Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph
(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other type of object such as e.g., a speed bump.
· Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph
(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to follow.
· The driver presses the brake pedal · The parking brake is activated · The gear selected is moved to P, N or R · The driver presses the button to put
ACC in standby mode
The parking brake is applied automatically In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle at a standstill.
This happens if:
· The driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seat belt
· The stability system is put in Sport mode
(see Stability system operation (p. 176))
· ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill
for more than 2 minutes
· The engine has been switched off · The brakes have overheated
Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
No automatic braking when at a
standstill
In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply
the brakes and go into standby mode while
If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be a stationary vehicle ahead
the vehicle is not moving. This means that the driver will have to apply the brakes.
192
07 Driver support
Radar sensor The radar sensor is designed to help detect cars or larger vehicles driving in the same direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.
The radar sensor and its limitations In addition to being used by the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), the radar sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see Distance Alert introduction (p. 198)) and Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see Collision warning introduction (p. 209)).
WARNING · If there is visible damage to the front
grille or you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged in any way, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. The radar sensor may only function partially (or not at all) if it is damaged or is not securely fastened in place.
· Accessories or other objects, such as
extra headlights, must not be installed in front of the grille.
· Modification of the radar sensor could
make its use illegal.
The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead is impeded:
· if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-
not detect other vehicles, for example in
heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are obscuring the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean.
· if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed. Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209) · Distance Alert introduction (p. 198)
Adaptive Cruise Control limitations The ACC cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. Situations where ACC may not function optimally
WARNING · The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not detect other vehicles at all.
· If ACC is not functioning properly,
cruise control will also be disabled.
07
}} 193
07 Driver support
||
Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)
In certain situations, the radar sensor
cannot detect vehicles at close quarters,
for example a vehicle that suddenly
enters the lane between your vehicle and
07
the target vehicle.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected.
In curves, the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle.
WARNING
· Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The "Function" section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using this feature.
· This system is designed to be a sup-
plementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.
· Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician.
WARNING · Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-
sion avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle.
· Adaptive Cruise Control does not react
to people or animals, or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.
· Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.
Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
194
07 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control symbols and messages
Symbols and messages in the display A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol Message Green symbol
Description A speed has been set.
White symbol
ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.
-
Standard cruise control has been selected manually.
-
Set ESC to Normal to ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system is switched normal operating mode, see
enable Cruise
Stability system introduction (p. 175) for more information.
-
Cruise control Cancel- ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle's speed/distance to the
led
vehicle ahead.
-
Cruise control Unavail- ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:
able
· high brake temperature
· the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)
07
Radar blocked See manual
ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles.
In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see Toggling between ACC and CC (standard Cruise Control) (p. 183)
See Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193) for information on the radar sensor's limitations.
}} 195
07 Driver support
|| Symbol Message
-
Cruise control Service
required
-
Press Brake To hold +
an audible signal
-
Below 30 km/h Only
following
Description ACC is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll. The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal. This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).
Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
07
196
07 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control troubleshooting If the message Radar blocked See manual is displayed, this means that the radar signals
from the sensor have been obstructed and that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. This, in turn, means that the functions of the ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning
System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection will not function. The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.
Cause The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals. The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Related information
· Adaptive Cruise Control introduction
(p. 184)
Action Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar. No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
07
197
07 Driver support
Distance Alert introduction Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Introduction Distance Alert is active at speeds above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval information is only given for a vehicle that is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direction. No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill.
NOTE
Distance Alert only monitors distance to the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode or off.
WARNING
Distance Alert only indicates the distance to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the speed of your vehicle.
Related information
· Distance Alert operation (p. 198) · Distance Alert limitations (p. 199) · Distance Alert symbols and messages
(p. 201)
07
Amber warning light4.
An amber warning light in the windshield
glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the
one ahead than the set time interval.
Distance Alert operation Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Press the button in the center instrument panel to switch this function on or off. The indicator light in the button illuminates when the function is on. Depending on the optional equipment selected, there may not be room for a Distance Alert button in the center console. In this case, the function is controlled through the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings Car settings Distance alert
On/Off.
4 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model
198
07 Driver support
Setting a time interval
NOTE
· The higher your vehicle's speed, the
greater the distance to the vehicle ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a given time interval.
· The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see Adaptive Cruise Control setting speed (p. 188).
Controls and display Time interval: Increase/decrease
Time interval On
Press to increase the interval or to decrease it.
Five different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the display as 15 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. One bar represents approximately 1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.
WARNING
Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions.
Related information
· Distance Alert introduction (p. 198) · Distance Alert limitations (p. 199) · Distance Alert symbols and messages
(p. 201)
Distance Alert limitations Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Limitations Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision Warning system. See Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193) for more information on the radar sensor's limitations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
WARNING
· Bad weather or winding roads may
affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead.
· The size of the vehicle ahead, such as
a motorcycle, may also make it difficult
to detect. This may result in the warn-
07
ing light illuminating at a shorter dis-
tance than the one that has been set,
or that the light will not come on at all.
}} 199
07 Driver support
|| Related information
· Distance Alert introduction (p. 198) · Distance Alert operation (p. 198) · Distance Alert symbols and messages
(p. 201)
07
200
07 Driver support
Distance Alert symbols and messages Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Symbols and text messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol Message Radar blocked See manual
Collision warn. Service required
Description Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193) for information on the radar sensor's limitations. Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Related information
· Distance Alert introduction (p. 198) · Distance Alert operation (p. 198) · Distance Alert limitations (p. 199)
07
201
07 Driver support
City Safety introduction
which means that the system cannot help the
WARNING
City SafetyTM5 is a support system designed to help the driver avoid low speed collisions when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic.
driver in all situations. City SafetyTM should not be used to alter the way in which the driver operates the vehicle. The driver should never rely solely on this
· City SafetyTM only reacts to vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your vehicle and does not react to small vehicles or motorcycles or to people or
City SafetyTM is not active if your vehicle's speed is below approximately 2 mph
system to safely stop the vehicle. Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will
animals.
· City SafetyTM is not activated when
(4 km/h). This means that City SafetyTM will
not be aware of City SafetyTM except when
your vehicle is backing up.
not react if your vehicle approaches another
the system intervenes when a low-speed col-
· City SafetyTM functions at speeds up
vehicle at very low speed, for example, when
lision is imminent.
to 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can
parking. The function is active at speeds up to approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists the driver by applying the brakes automatically, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a collision. City SafetyTM is designed to intervene as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.
If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional Collision Warning with Full Autobrake and Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems interact. For more information about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake system, see Collision warning introduction (p. 209) .
WARNING
help prevent a collision if the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in speed is greater, a collision cannot be avoided but the speed at which the collision occurs can be reduced. The driver must apply the vehicle's brakes for full braking effect.
· City SafetyTM will not intervene in a
City SafetyTM triggers brief, forceful braking if
a low-speed collision is imminent. However,
the system will not intervene in situations
where the driver actively steers the vehicle or
applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot
07
be avoided. This is done in order to always
give the driver's actions highest priority.
City SafetyTM activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time,
· City SafetyTM is a supplemental aid to
the driver. It can never replace the driver's attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
· City SafetyTM does not function in all
driving situations or in all traffic, weather or road conditions.
potential collision situation if the vehicle is being driven actively. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to a vehicle or object ahead. Related information
· City Safety function (p. 203) · City Safety operation (p. 204) · City Safety limitations (p. 204)
5 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation
202
07 Driver support
· City Safety troubleshooting (p. 205) · City Safety symbols and messages
(p. 207)
· City Safety Laser sensor (p. 208)
City Safety function Function
tion display to indicate that the system is/has been active.
NOTE · When City SafetyTM applies the
brakes, the brake lights will illuminate.
· In cases where City SafetyTM has stop-
ped the vehicle, the system will then release the brakes. The driver must apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
Location of the laser sensor in the windshield6 City SafetyTM monitors traffic ahead of you using a laser sensor mounted in the upper section of the windshield. If a collision is imminent, City SafetyTM will automatically apply the brakes, which may feel like hard braking.
Related information
· City Safety introduction (p. 202) · City Safety operation (p. 204) · City Safety limitations (p. 204) · City Safety troubleshooting (p. 205) · City Safety symbols and messages
(p. 207)
· City Safety Laser sensor (p. 208)
If the difference in speed between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle ahead is more than
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City SafetyTM
alone cannot prevent a collision from taking
07
place. The driver must apply the brakes to
help avoid a collision or reduce its effect.
When the function activates and applies the brakes, a message will appear in the informa-
6 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model
203
07 Driver support
City Safety operation
Using City SafetyTM
NOTE
The City SafetyTM function is activated automatically each time the engine has been switched off and restarted.
On and Off In certain situations, it may be desirable to switch City SafetyTM off, such as when driving in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc. may obscure the hood and windshield. When the engine is running, City SafetyTM can be switched off as follows: Press My Car in the center console control panel and go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems City Safety. Select Off. If the engine is switched off, City SafetyTM will reactivate when the engine is restarted.
Related information
· City Safety introduction (p. 202) · City Safety function (p. 203) · City Safety limitations (p. 204) · City Safety troubleshooting (p. 205) · City Safety symbols and messages
(p. 207)
· City Safety Laser sensor (p. 208) · My Car introduction (p. 76)
07
WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the igni-
tion is in mode II or higher, even if City
SafetyTM has been switched off.
To switch City SafetyTM on again:
· Follow the same procedure as for switch-
ing City SafetyTM off but select On.
204
City Safety limitations Limitations
WARNING
The laser sensor has certain limitations and its function may be reduced (or it may not function at all) in conditions such as heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield may also interfere with the sensor's function.
The sensor used by City SafetyTM is designed to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and darkness. Objects such as warning flags hanging from long objects on the roof or accessories such as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may also impede the sensor's function. Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increases on slippery road surfaces, which may reduce City Safety's capacity to avoid a collision. In situations like this, the stability system (see Stability system introduction (p. 175)) will help provide the best possible braking capacity and stability. City SafetyTM emits a laser beam and measures the way in which the light is reflected.
07 Driver support
Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflec- City Safety troubleshooting
NOTE
tive surfaces may not be detected. Normally, the license plate and taillight reflectors give the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflective surfaces to be detected.
Troubleshooting If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in the information display, this indicates that the City SafetyTM laser sensor is obstructed in
If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in front the laser sensor, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield (see the
NOTE
some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead
illustration showing the location of the sen-
· Keep the windshield in front of the
laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc., see City Safety function (p. 203).
· Snow or ice on the hood deeper than
2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow.
· Do not mount or in any way attach
anything on the windshield that could obstruct the laser sensor.
of you, which means that the system is not functioning. However, this message will not be displayed in all situations in which the sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the sensor is always kept clean. The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions.
Cause
Action
sor in City Safety function (p. 203)). Failing to do so may result in reduced City SafetyTM functionality.
To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following:
· Volvo recommends that cracks,
scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front of the laser sensor should not be repaired; in such cases, the entire windshield should be replaced.
· Before the windshield is replaced,
contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that
Related information
· City Safety introduction (p. 202) · City Safety function (p. 203) · City Safety operation (p. 204) · City Safety troubleshooting (p. 205) · City Safety symbols and messages
(p. 207)
The area of the windshield in front of the sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow.
Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow.
The laser sensor's field of view is obstructed.
Remove the obstruction.
the correct windshield is ordered and
installed. If the wrong type of wind-
shield is used, this may cause City
SafetyTM to function improperly or not
at all. Volvo recommends the use of
only Genuine Volvo Replacement
Windshields.
07
· When replacing windshield wipers, use
· City Safety Laser sensor (p. 208)
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.
}} 205
07 Driver support
|| Related information
· City Safety introduction (p. 202) · City Safety function (p. 203) · City Safety operation (p. 204) · City Safety limitations (p. 204) · City Safety symbols and messages
(p. 207)
· City Safety Laser sensor (p. 208)
07
206
07 Driver support
City Safety symbols and messages
Symbols and messages in the display When City SafetyTM automatically applies the brakes, one or more of the symbols in the
main instrument panel may illuminate and its associated message will be displayed.
A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol Message Auto braking by City Safety
Meaning/action required City SafetyTM is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.
Windscreen Sensors blocked City Safety Service required
The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.
· Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).
For more information on the sensor's limitations, see City Safety limitations (p. 204).
City SafetyTM is not functioning.
· If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Related information
· City Safety introduction (p. 202)
· City Safety function (p. 203)
· City Safety operation (p. 204)
· City Safety limitations (p. 204)
07
· City Safety troubleshooting (p. 205)
· City Safety Laser sensor (p. 208)
207
07 Driver support
City Safety Laser sensor The laser sensor
The upper decal describes the laser beam's classification and contains the following text:
Invisible Laser radiation Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers) Class 1M laser product.
The lower decal describes the laser beam's physical data and contains the text:
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with
FDA performance standards for laser prod-
07
ucts except for deviations pursuant to Laser
Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001
The laser beam's physical data is listed in the following table:
Maximum pulse energy Maximum average output Pulse length Divergence (horizontal × vertical)
2.64 J 45 mW 33 ns 28° × 12°
NOTE
The function of aftermarket laser detectors may be affected by City Safety's laser sensor.
WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City SafetyTM has been switched off.
WARNING
Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed:
· It is essential that all pertinent instruc-
tions be followed when handling laser instruments. Testing, repairing, removing, adjusting and/or replacing any components in the laser sensor may only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Do not remove the laser sensor
(including removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B present a risk of injury to the eyes.
· The laser sensor's connector must be
disconnected before the sensor is removed from the windshield.
· The laser sensor must be mounted in
place on the windshield before connecting the sensor's connector.
· Do not view the laser sensor (which
emits spreading, invisible laser beams) with optical instruments from a distance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).
Related information
· City Safety introduction (p. 202) · City Safety function (p. 203) · City Safety operation (p. 204)
208
· City Safety limitations (p. 204) · City Safety troubleshooting (p. 205) · City Safety symbols and messages
(p. 207)
07 Driver support
Collision warning introduction Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is designed to assist the driver if there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, a cyclist, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill or one that is moving in the same direction as your vehicle.
This system consists of the following three functions:
· Collision Warning warns the driver of a
potential collision situation.
· Brake Support helps the driver brake
efficiently in a critical situation.
· Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-
cally if a collision with a pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle cannot be avoided and the driver does not apply the brakes in time or steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-brake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. Since Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is activated in circumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner, the system will not be able to assist the driver in all situations.
This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary intervention.
The system should not be used in such a way that the driver changes his/her way of operat-
ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the system, the chances of an accident eventually occurring increase considerably. The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake and City SafetyTM systems supplement each other. See City Safety introduction (p. 202) for detailed information about City SafetyTM.
WARNING
No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations. For that reason, never test the Auto-brake system by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death.
07
}} 209
07 Driver support
|| WARNING
· Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake does not work in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. It does not react to vehicles not traveling in the same direction as your vehicle.
· Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake does not react to animals.
· Warnings are only provided when the
risk of collision is high. The "Function" section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using Collision Warning.
· Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake will not provide a warning or brake the vehicle for pedestrians or cyclists at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
07
WARNING · Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake will not provide a warning or brake the vehicle for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.
· The auto-brake function can help pre-
vent a collision or reduce the speed at impact but the driver should always apply the brakes for the best possible braking effect, even if auto-brake is actively applying the brakes.
· Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is in use.
· Maintenance of the Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake system's components must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician.
Related information
· Collision warning* function (p. 211) · Collision warning* operation (p. 212) · Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215) · The camera's limitations (p. 217) · The camera's limitations (p. 217) · Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
· Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Collision warning* function
Brake Support If the risk of collision continues to increase after the collision warning has been given, Brake Support is activated. Brake Support prepares the brake system to react quickly, and the brakes are applied slightly. This may be experienced as a light tug.
If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking effect will be provided. Brake Support also increases brake force if the system determines that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal.
· Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215) · Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
· Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
Function overview
Auto-brake If a collision is imminent and the driver has
Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk not applied the brakes or begun to steer
Radar sensor
around the vehicle, pedestrian or a cyclist, the auto-brake function is activated without
Camera
the driver pressing the brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help reduce the vehicle's
Collision Warning The radar sensor and the camera work together to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist, sta-
speed when the collision occurs or limited brake force is applied if this is sufficient to avoid the collision.
tionary vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there
NOTE
is a risk of collision with a vehicle, a cyclist or a pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flash-
The auto-brake and brake support functions are always on and cannot be turned
07
ing red warning light and an audible warning
off.
signal. The system is active at speeds above
3 mph (4 km/h).
Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209)
· Collision warning* operation (p. 212)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211
07 Driver support
Collision warning* operation
Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and using the menus displayed.
Activating/deactivating both warning signals To switch the system's audible and visual signals on or off at the same time, press MY CAR on the center console control panel and go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning. If Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
ter console control panel and going to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Warning sound if risk of collision.
Setting a warning distance This setting determines the distance at which the visual and audible warnings are triggered. Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning Warning distance.
NOTE
· When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,
the warning light and signal will be used by that function, even if the warnings provided by Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake have been deactivated by the driver.
· In situations where traffic is moving at
considerably different speeds, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warnings may be considered to be late, even if the setting Long has been selected.
Auto Brake is on, the system will perform a self-test each time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning light. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
The warning distance determines the level of sensitivity used by the system. The warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. Begin by using Long and if the system gives too many warnings, try changing to Normal.
Checking settings The current system settings can be checked by pressing MY CAR on the center console
control panel and going to Settings Car
When the engine is switched on, the system setting that was being used when it was
WARNING
settings Driver support systems Collision Warning.
switched off will be the default setting. NOTE
· The setting Short should only be used
in situations where traffic is light and moving at low speeds.
Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209)
The auto-brake and pedestrian/cyclist
07
detection features are always on, even if
the audible and visual warning signals
have been deactivated.
Activating/deactivating the audible warning signal only
The audible warning signal can be activated/
· Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake alerts the driver to the risk of a collision but this function cannot reduce the driver's reaction time.
· For the system to be as effective as
possible, it is recommended that Distance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see Distance Alert operation (p. 198).
· Collision warning* function (p. 211) · Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215) · The camera's limitations (p. 217)
deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the cen-
212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
· Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
· Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
Collision warning* Cyclist detection The system can detect a cyclist and autobrake if certain parameters are fulfilled.
07 Driver support
The function only detects cyclists from behind who are moving in the same direction as your vehicle
The Cyclist Detection feature requires the fol-
Optimal example of what the system considers
lowing in order to function:
to be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours, straight from behind and directly in front of the vehicle
· The cyclist must be an adult riding an
In order to help detect a cyclist, the system has to receive clear information about the contours of the cyclist's body and the bike. It has to able to clearly detect the bike, the cyclist's head, arms, shoulders, legs and upper and lower body combined with the per-
"adult-size" bike
· The bike must be equipped with an
approved and clearly visible rear-facing red reflector that is mounted at least 27 in. (70 cm) above the road surface
· The feature can only detect a cyclist
son's pattern of movement when cycling.
straight from behind and who is moving in
the same direction as your vehicle
07
· A cyclist who is to the left or right of your
vehicle may be detected late or not at all.
· The camera's capacity to see a cyclist at
dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for the human eye.
· The camera's function is deactivated and
will not detect a cyclist in darkness or in
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213
07 Driver support
|| tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.
· For optimal cyclist detection, City
SafetyTM must be activated.
WARNING
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215) · Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
· Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
The system cannot detect a bike/cyclist if:
· He/she is wearing loose-fitting clothing
that may obscure body contours
· The bike is approaching your vehicle
from the side
· The bike is not equipped with a rear-
facing red reflector
· The bike is carrying large objects · Most of the cyclist's body or the bike
itself cannot be "seen" by the system's camera
07 Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209) · Collision warning* function (p. 211) · Collision warning* operation (p. 212) · Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
The system cannot identify all pedestrians The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake system can only identify and detect a pedestrian who is standing upright. This person can be standing still, walking or running. This means that the system has to be able to identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a person's pattern of movement when walking or running. If parts of the body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the pedestrian. The following conditions apply:
· In order to detect a pedestrian, the sys-
tem must have a full view of the person's
07 Driver support
entire body and the person must be at least 32 in. (80 cm) tall.
· The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying a large object.
· The camera's capacity to see a pedes-
trian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for the human eye.
· The camera's function is deactivated and
will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.
WARNING · Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
· The system cannot detect all pedes-
trians in all situations, such as in darkness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or people wearing clothing that obscures the contours of their bodies.
Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209) · Collision warning* function (p. 211) · Collision warning* operation (p. 212)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215) · Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
· Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
Collision warning* limitations
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. For this reason, always activate the audible warning signal. Slippery driving conditions increase braking distance, which can reduce the system's capacity to avoid a collision. In these conditions, the ABS and stability systems provide the best possible braking effect while helping to maintain stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal may be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature due to strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible warning signal will be used, even if it has been deactivated in the menu system.
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 215
07 Driver support
|| WARNING
· In certain situations, the system can-
not provide warnings or warnings may be delayed if traffic conditions or other external factors make it impossible for the radar sensor or camera to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist or a vehicle ahead.
· Warnings may not be provided if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is short, or if movements of the steering wheel/ brake pedal are great, such as during active driving.
· The sensor system has a limited range
for pedestrians/cyclists and provides warnings and braking effect most effectively at speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the system functions best if your vehicle's speed is below approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
· Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles may not be provided in dark conditions or in poor visibility.
07
The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake system uses the same radar sen-
sors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more
information on the radar sensor and its limita-
tions, see Adaptive Cruise Control limita-
tions (p. 193).
NOTE
If warnings are given too frequently, the warning distance can be reduced (see Collision warning* operation (p. 212)). This causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the total number of warnings provided.
WARNING · The system is not activated at speeds
under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). Therefore, it will not brake your vehicle if you approach a vehicle ahead at very low speed, such as when parking.
· The driver's actions always have high-
est priority and override the Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake system. This means that the system will not intervene in situations where the driver is actively steering, braking or pressing the accelerator pedal, even if a collision is imminent.
· When Auto-brake has prevented a col-
lision with a stationary object, your vehicle will remain at a standstill for approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your vehicle's speed will be reduced to the same speed as that vehicle's.
Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209) · Collision warning* operation (p. 212) · Collision warning* function (p. 211) · Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
· The camera's limitations (p. 217) · Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
· Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
The camera's limitations The camera has the same limitations as the human eye.
The camera is used by Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake Collision warning introduction (p. 209), Active High Beams (Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)), Road Sign Information (Road Sign Information (RSI)* introduction (p. 179)) and Driver Alert System (Driver Alert System (p. 222)) with Lane Departure Warning.
NOTE · To help protect the camera in very hot
conditions, it may be temporarily switched off for approximately 15 minutes after the engine has been started.
· Keep the section of the windshield in
front of the camera clean and free of ice, snow, or condensation.
WARNING
· The camera has the same type of limi-
tations as the human eye, i.e., it cannot see as well in heavy snowfall or rain, thick fog or in heavy blowing dust or snow. In such conditions, systems depending on the camera may experience greatly reduced functionality or may be temporarily deactivated.
· Never place any objects, decals, etc.,
on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the camera's function, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the camera to stop functioning.
· Strong sunlight, reflections from the
road surface, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera's capacity to detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle.
· Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
· Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
· Road Sign Information (RSI)* introduc-
tion (p. 179)
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)
Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209)
· Collision warning* function (p. 211)
07
· Collision warning* operation (p. 212)
· Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217
07 Driver support
Collision warning troubleshooting
Fault tracing and actions If the message Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed, this means that the camera is obscured and cannot detect
pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road marker lines in front of the vehicle. This, in turn, means that Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake, Driver Alert Control, Lane Departure Warning or
Lane Keeping Aid will not have full functionality. The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.
Cause The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera.
The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the display. The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty.
Action Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register visibility. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this surface cleaned.
07
218
Maintenance
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215) · The camera's limitations (p. 217) · Collision warning symbols and mes-
sages (p. 220)
07 Driver support
Camera and radar sensor7. In order to function properly, the camera and radar sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice, snow, etc., will reduce the function of these components. Remove ice and snow when necessary and wash these areas regularly with a suitable car washing liquid. Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209) · Collision warning* function (p. 211) · Collision warning* operation (p. 212) · Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
7 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219
07 Driver support
Collision warning symbols and messages The table lists possible causes for collision warning-related messages being displayed, and suitable actions.
A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol Message Collis'n warning OFF
Collision Warning Unavailable
Auto braking was activated
Description Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button. Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button. Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see The camera's limitations (p. 217) for more information on the camera's limitations.
Radar blocked See Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is
manual
blocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect
07
other vehicles, see Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193) for more information on the radar sensor's
limitations.
Collision warn. Service required
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is partially or completely not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.
220
Related information
· Collision warning introduction (p. 209) · Collision warning* function (p. 211) · Collision warning* operation (p. 212) · Collision warning* Pedestrian detection
(p. 214)
· Collision warning* Cyclist detection
(p. 213)
· Collision warning* limitations (p. 215) · Collision warning troubleshooting
(p. 218)
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221
07 Driver support
Driver Alert System The Driver Alert System is designed to help a driver who may be becoming fatigued or who is inadvertently leaving the lane.
Introduction
Driver Alert Control (DAC) introduction DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the driver is distracted or fatigued.
NOTE
The camera has certain limitations, see Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 193).
The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- DAC is designed to help detect a slowly
WARNING
ent functions that can be switched on together or separately.
· Driver Alert Control (DAC), see Driver
changing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be used on main roads and is not meant for use in city traffic.
· DAC is not intended to extend the
duration of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals to help remain alert.
Alert Control (DAC) introduction (p. 222)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see
· A warning from DAC should not be
ignored. A driver may not be aware of how fatigued he/she has become.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) introduction (p. 227)
· In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver's behavior. In situations of
When one or both of the functions has been switched on, it is in standby mode and is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h).
this type, no warning will be provided. Therefore, it is important to take breaks at regular intervals, regardless of whether or not DAC has given a warning.
The function deactivates if the vehicle's
speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).
Related information
Both functions use a camera that is depend-
A camera monitors the painted lines marking
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) function
ent on the road/lane being clearly marked by
the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and
(p. 223)
painted lines on each side. 07
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not function
compares the direction of the road with the driver's movements of the steering wheel. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane smoothly.
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) operation
(p. 223)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) limitations
(p. 224)
in all situations and is designed to be a supplementary aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) symbols and
messages (p. 225)
and judgement.
222
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
duction (p. 227)
07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC) operation Driver Alert Control (DAC) function
Operating DAC Settings are made using menu system and the display in the center console. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for more information on the menu system.
Function Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will remain active as long as the speed is over approx. 37 mph (60 km/h).
On/Off To put Driver Alert in standby mode:
· In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car
settings Driver support systems Driver Alert and check the box. If the box is not checked, the function is off.
If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and the message Driver Alert Time for a break is displayed. The warning will be repeated after a short time if the driving pattern remains the same.
Related information
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) introduction
Press the OK button to erase a message.
(p. 222)
WARNING
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) function
(p. 223)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) limitations
(p. 224)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) symbols and
messages (p. 225)
· An alert should be taken seriously
since it is sometimes difficult for a driver to realize that he/she is fatigued.
· In the event of a warning or if the
driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible in a safe place and rest.
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) introduction
(p. 222)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
Related information
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) introduction
07
duction (p. 227)
(p. 222)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) operation
(p. 223)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) limitations
(p. 224)
}} 223
07 Driver support
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) symbols and
messages (p. 225)
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
duction (p. 227)
07
Driver Alert Control (DAC) limitations
Limitations In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver's driving pattern has not become erratic:
· in strong crosswinds · on grooved road surfaces. · if the driver is testing the LDW function,
see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) introduction (p. 227)
Related information
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) introduction
(p. 222)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) function
(p. 223)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) operation
(p. 223)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) symbols and
messages (p. 225)
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
duction (p. 227)
224
07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC) symbols and messages Depending on the situation, DAC may display certain symbols and text messages in the instrument panel or center console screen.
Symbols and messages Instrument panel
Symbol Message
Description
Driver Alert Time for a break
The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.
Windscreen Sensors blocked Driver Alert Sys Service required
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera's limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera's limitations. The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.
07
}} 225
07 Driver support
|| Center console display
Symbol Message
-
Driver Alert OFF
-
Driver Alert Available
-
Driver Alert Standby <65
km/h
-
Driver Alert Unavailable
Description The function is not switched on. The function is active. The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera's limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera's limitations.
Related information
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) introduction
(p. 222)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) function
(p. 223)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) operation
(p. 223)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) limitations
(p. 224)
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
duction (p. 227) 07
226
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) introduction The LDW function is designed to help reduce the risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off the road or into the opposite lane.
WARNING
This feature is only intended to assist the driver and does not function in all driving, weather, traffic or road conditions. As the driver, you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) operation Operation and function
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) The illustration is generic
Related information
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols
and messages (p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) opera-
tion (p. 227)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 229)
LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the button on the center console. A light in the button illuminates when the function is on. This is supplemented by graphic displays in the instrument panel, for example:
LDW uses the camera located at the center,
upper edge of the windshield to monitor the
road's/lane's side marker lines. If the vehicle
crosses a side marker line or the road's center dividing line, the driver will be alerted by
07
an audible signal.
}} 227
07 Driver support
||
LDW displayed in the instrument panel
· The LDW symbol has white side marker
lines: the function is active and "sees" one or both of the road's side marker lines.
· The LDW symbol has gray side marker
lines: the function is active but cannot "see" one or both of the road's side marker lines.
or
· The LDW symbol has gray side marker
lines: the function is in standby mode
because the vehicle's speed is below
07
40 mph (65 km/h).
· The LDW symbol has no side marker
lines: the function is deactivated.
WARNING
The driver will only be warned once for each time the wheels cross a marker line. No alarm will be given if a marker line is between the wheels.
Settings Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be made in the menu system by pressing My Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Lane Departure Warning. There are two alternatives:
· On at start-up: This selection switches
LDW on each time the engine is started. Otherwise, the system will be in the mode that it was in when the engine was switched off.
· Increased sensitivity: This selection
increases the function's sensitivity. Warnings will be given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations apply. When this setting is being used, the system only needs to monitor lane marker lines on one side of the vehicle to change status to Lane Depart Warn Available.
Related information
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols
and messages (p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
duction (p. 227)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 229)
228
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) limitations
Limitations The camera used by LDW has the same limitations as the human eye. See The camera's limitations (p. 217) for more information about the camera's limitations.
NOTE
No warning signal will be given in the certain situations, such as:
· If the turn signal is being used · The driver's foot is on the brake pedal8 · The accelerator pedal is pressed
quickly8
· If the steering wheel is moved quickly8 · In sharp turns that cause the vehicle's
body to sway
Related information
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols
and messages (p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) opera-
tion (p. 227)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
duction (p. 227)
8 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.
07 Driver support
07
229
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols and messages
Symbols and messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol Message Lane departure warning ON/ Lane departure warning OFF
Description The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.
-
Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road's marker lines.
-
Lane Depart. Warning
Unavailable at this speed
The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).
-
Lane Depart Warn Unavaila- The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera's
ble
limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera's limitations.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera's limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera's limitations.
07
Driver Alert Sys Service
The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the mes-
required
sage remains in the display.
230
Related information
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) opera-
tion (p. 227)
· Driver Alert System (p. 222) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) intro-
duction (p. 227)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 229)
07 Driver support
07
231
07 Driver support
Park assist introduction The park assist system is designed to assist you when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc. An audible signal and symbols in the audio system's display indicate the distance to the object.
The park assist system utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehicle or an object that may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) function
(p. 237)
Park assist function Signals from the park assist system
NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with the vehicle's electrical system will be included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle.
WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT
a safety system. This system is designed
to be a supplementary aid when parking
the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judge-
07
ment.
Related information
· Park assist limitations (p. 235) · Park assist function (p. 232) · Park assist operation (p. 234) · Park assist troubleshooting (p. 236)
View in the display (warning for objects front left/ right rear) Visual indicator The audio system's display gives an overview of the vehicle's position in relation to a detected object.
The marked sectors in the display indicate that one or more of the sensors has detected an object. The closer the car symbol comes to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object.
If the infotainment system is switched off, the park assist system will not be able to provide a visual indicator. An audible signal will still be provided.
232
07 Driver support
Audible signal The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an object, and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are objects within this distance both behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between front and rear speakers.
NOTE
The level of the audible signal can be lowered/raised with the infotainment volume control. The level can also be set in the MY CAR menu system. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
If the volume of another source from the audio system is high, this will be automatically lowered.
Rear park assist
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal comes from the rear speakers. The system must be deactivated when towing a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park assist system's sensors.
G017833
NOTE
· Rear park assist is deactivated auto-
matically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. If a nonVolvo trailer hitch is being used, it may be necessary to switch off the system manually, see Park assist operation (p. 234).
· The system will not detect high
objects, such as a loading dock, etc.
· Objects such as chains, thin shiny
poles or low objects may temporarily not be detected by the system. This may result in the pulsing tone unexpectedly stopping instead of changing to a constant tone as the vehicle approaches the object. In such cases, use caution when backing up or stop the vehicle to help avoid damage.
07
}} 233
07 Driver support
|| Front park assist
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) function
(p. 237)
Park assist operation Function
G021424
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the audio system's front speakers. It may not be possible to combine auxiliary headlights and front park assist since these lights could trigger the system's sensors.
NOTE
Front park assist is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied and or when the
07
gear selector is in the P position.
Related information
· Park assist introduction (p. 232) · Park assist limitations (p. 235) · Park assist operation (p. 234) · Park assist troubleshooting (p. 236)
234
Park assist button
The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates when the system is on.
· The front park assist system is active
from the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also active when the vehicle is backing up.
· Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been selected.
07 Driver support
Activating/deactivating The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the system(s). > The indicator light in the button will go
out when the system has been deactivated. Park assist will be automatically reactivated the next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the button will illuminate).
NOTE
Park assist is disengaged automatically when the parking brake is applied.
Related information
· Park assist introduction (p. 232) · Park assist limitations (p. 235) · Park assist function (p. 232) · Park assist troubleshooting (p. 236) · Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) function
(p. 237)
Park assist limitations Cleaning the sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and a suitable car washing detergent.
Location of the front sensors
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system. Related information
· Park assist introduction (p. 232) · Park assist function (p. 232) · Park assist operation (p. 234) · Park assist troubleshooting (p. 236) · Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) function
(p. 237)
07
Location of the rear sensors
235
07 Driver support
Park assist troubleshooting
Faults in the system If the information symbol illuminates and Park assist syst Service required is shown on the information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system.
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) introduction The Park Assist Camera is designed to provide the driver with a view of the area behind the vehicle when backing up.
Introduction PAC uses the display in the center console to show the area behind the car while you are backing up. PAC also shows guiding lines in the onscreen image to indicate the direction that the vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle. The images of vehicles in this section are generic and may not depict your specific model.
WARNING · PAC is designed to be a supplemen-
tary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgment.
· The camera has blind spots where it
cannot detect objects or people behind the vehicle.
· Pay particular attention to people or
animals that are close to the vehicle.
· Objects seen on the screen may be
closer than they appear to be.
Related information
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) opera-
tion (p. 237)
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) limita-
tions (p. 240)
Related information
· Park assist introduction (p. 232)
· Park assist limitations (p. 235)
· Park assist function (p. 232)
07
· Park assist operation (p. 234)
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) function
(p. 237)
NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with the vehicle's electrical system will be included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle.
236
07 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) function Function
The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and if a person or animal should suddenly appear from the side. PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the opening handle. The camera has built-in electronics that help reduce the "fish-eye" effect so that the image shown on the screen is as natural as possible. This may cause some objects on the screen to "lean," which is normal. Ambient lighting conditions The camera automatically monitors the ambient lighting conditions behind the vehicle and constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may cause the brightness and quality of the image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitiv-
ity to light is increased in dark conditions or in bad weather, which may affect image quality. If the image on the screen seems too dark, brightness can be increased with the thumb wheel on the lighting panel.
NOTE
In order to function properly, the camera lens should always be kept clean. This is particularly important in bad weather. Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.
Related information
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) intro-
duction (p. 236)
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) opera-
tion (p. 237)
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) limita-
tions (p. 240)
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) operation Activation
PAC is activated when the gear selector is moved to R if the system is selected in the MY CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM button in the center console. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
If PAC is not activated when the gear selector
is moved to R, press the CAM button on the
center console.
PAC will automatically override the view cur-
07
rently on the screen and will display the cam-
era's view behind the vehicle.
Deactivation Move the gear selector from R to another gear. The camera remains active for approx.
}} 237
07 Driver support
|| 5 seconds after the gear selector has been moved from R or until the vehicle's forward speed exceeds 6 mph/10 km/h (21 mph/35 km/h in reverse). The screen will then revert to the view that was displayed before R was selected.
NOTE
If any button on the center console control panel is pressed, the camera image will disappear from the display. Pressing CAM will return the camera image to the display.
Related information
· Park assist introduction (p. 232) · Park assist function (p. 232) · Park assist troubleshooting (p. 236) · Park assist limitations (p. 235) · Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) intro-
duction (p. 236)
Settings By default, PAC is set to activate when the gear selector is moved to R
To change PAC settings when a camera view is displayed:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is on the screen. A menu will be displayed.
2. Turn TUNE to scroll to the desired setting.
3. Press OK/MENU to make the setting and exit the menu by pressing EXIT.
07
Summary
· Pressing CAM will activate the camera
even if the gear selector is not in Reverse.
· If there are two cameras installed on the
vehicle*, turn TUNE or press CAM to tog-
gle between the cameras.
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) guiding and marker lines Guiding lines
The lines on the screen are projected as if they were a path on the ground behind the vehicle and are directly affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel while backing up.
NOTE
When backing up with a trailer, the guiding lines show the path that the vehicle will take, not the trailer.
238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
WARNING
Keep in mind that the image on the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle. The driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of the vehicle when turning while backing up.
Marker lines
These lines also indicate the outermost limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle, even when it turns. Vehicles equipped with Park Assist
Related information
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) opera-
tion (p. 237)
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) limita-
tions (p. 240)
The PAC system's lines An area approx. 1 ft (30 cm) behind the vehicle The line marking the unobstructed area behind the vehicle
The red line (1) frames an area approx. 1 ft (30 cm) behind the vehicle from the bumper. The yellow horizontal line (2) frames an area up to approx. 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the bumper.
Colored markers (one for each sensor) indicate distance If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park Assist system (see Park assist introduction (p. 232)), the distance to an object will be indicated more exactly and colored markers in the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has detected the object.
Color Green Yellow Red
Distance to object 2.55 ft (0.81.5 m) 1.32.5 ft (0.40.8 m) 01.3 ft (00.4 m)
07
239
07 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) limitations
Limitations Even if a fairly small section of the screen image appears to be obstructed, this may mean that a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hidden and objects there may not be detected until they are very near the vehicle.
NOTE
Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's field of view.
Keep in mind
· Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice
and snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to avoid scratching the lens.
· Clean the lens regularly with warm water
and a suitable car washing detergent.
Related information
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) intro-
07
duction (p. 236)
· Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) opera-
tion (p. 237)
· Park assist introduction (p. 232)
BLIS* introduction The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an information system that indicates the presence of another vehicle moving in the same direction as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind area."
BLIS camera Indicator light BLIS symbol
CAUTION
The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
G021426
WARNING · BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.
· BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes.
· As the driver, you have full responsibil-
ity for changing lanes in a safe manner.
The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras are located beneath the side-view mirrors. When one (or both) of the cameras have detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see the illustration, the indicator light in the door panel illuminates. The light will glow continuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the blind area.
NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at the same time, both lights will illuminate.
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the BLIS* function
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
driver if a fault should occur with the system. For example, if one or both of the system's cameras are obscured, a message (see the table inBLIS* messages (p. 243)) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, the system can be temporarily switched off (for instructions, see BLIS* messages (p. 243)).
When does BLIS function The system functions when your vehicle is moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
When you pass another vehicle: The system reacts when you pass another vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) faster than that vehicle.
When you are passed by another
motorcycles, etc.
Darkness BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a vehicle in the blind area must have its headlights on. This means, for example, that the system will not detect a trailer without headlights that is being towed behind a car or truck.
vehicle: The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
WARNING · BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.
WARNING
· BLIS does not react to vehicles that
are standing still.
· BLIS does not function in sharp
· The BLIS cameras have the same limi-
curves.
tation as the human eye. In other
Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters) Related information
· BLIS* function (p. 241) · BLIS* operation (p. 242)
· BLIS does not function when your
vehicle is backing up.
· If you are towing a wide trailer, this
may prevent the BLIS cameras from detecting other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
How BLIS functions in daylight and darkness
words, their "vision is impaired" by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, intense light directly into the camera, dense fog, etc. Related information
· BLIS* introduction (p. 240) · BLIS* operation (p. 242) · BLIS* limitations (p. 242)
07
· BLIS* limitations (p. 242)
Daylight
· BLIS* messages (p. 243)
· BLIS* messages (p. 243)
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-
cles. The system is designed to help detect
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241
07 Driver support
BLIS* operation Switching BLIS on and off
BLIS can be switched on and off in the menu system by pressing MY CAR and going to Settings Car settings BLIS. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.
Related information
· BLIS* introduction (p. 240) · BLIS* function (p. 241) · BLIS* limitations (p. 242) · BLIS* messages (p. 243)
BLIS* limitations
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occasionally even when there are no other vehicles in the blind area, this does not indicate a fault in the system. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. Service required will be displayed.
BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.
· The system can be switched off by press-
ing the BLIS button in the center console (see the illustration). The indicator light in the button goes out when the system is switched off, and a text message is displayed.
· BLIS can be switched on again by press-
07
ing the button. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate and a new text mes-
sage will be displayed. Press the OK but-
ton (see Information display menu con-
trols (p. 112)) to erase the message.
Depending on the vehicle's optional equipment, there may not be space for the BLIS button in the center console. In this case,
The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system. Light reflected from a wet road surface
242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on a highway
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low on the horizon Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.
CAUTION · Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.
· The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gently brush away snow from the lenses.
CAUTION
The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Related information
· BLIS* introduction (p. 240) · BLIS* function (p. 241) · BLIS* operation (p. 242) · BLIS* messages (p. 243)
BLIS* messages
BLIS system messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Text in the display Blind spot syst. Service required
Blind spot syst. Camera blocked Blind-spot info system ON
System status
BLIS not functioning properly. Contact an authorized Volvo service technician. BLIS camera obscured. Clean the lenses.
BLIS system on
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 243
07 Driver support
|| Text in the display Blind-spot info system OFF Blind spot syst. Reduced function
System status BLIS system off The BLIS cameras' function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer between the BLIS system's cameras and the vehicle's electrical system. The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal.
Related information
· BLIS* introduction (p. 240) · BLIS* function (p. 241) · BLIS* operation (p. 242) · BLIS* limitations (p. 242)
07
244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
STARTING AND DRIVING
08 Starting and driving
Starting the engine The engine can be started/switched off using the remote key and the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Ignition slot with remote key inserted (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for more information on ignition modes)
WARNING
Before starting the engine:
· Fasten the seat belt. · Check that the seat, steering wheel
and mirrors are adjusted properly.
· Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if necessary.
WARNING · Never use more than one floor mat at
a time on the driver's floor. Before driving, remove the original mat from the driver's seat floor before using any other type of floor mat. Any mat used in this position should be securely and properly anchored in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded.
· Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
factured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's side.
1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot as far as possible, with the metallic key blade pointing outward (not inserted into the slot)1.
2. Depress the brake pedal2.
3. Press and release the START/STOP ENGINE button. The autostart function will operate the starter motor until the engine starts or until its overheating function stops it. The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not started, repeat the procedure.
CAUTION
If the engine does not start after the third try, wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying to start it again to give the battery time to recover its starting capacity.
NOTE
Keyless drive* To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless drive feature, one of the remote keys must be in the passenger compartment. Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to start the vehicle.
08
1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger's compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.
246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
WARNING
· Always remove the remote key from
the ignition slot when leaving the vehicle and ensure that the ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the ignition modes).
· On vehicles with the optional keyless
drive, never remove the remote key from the vehicle while it is being driven or towed.
· Always place the gear selector in Park
and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running.
· Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous.
NOTE · After a cold start, idle speed may be
noticeably higher than normal for a short period. This is done to help bring components in the emission control system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which enables them to control emissions and help reduce the vehicle's impact on the environment3.
CAUTION · When starting in cold weather, the
automatic transmission may shift up at slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission fluid reaches normal operating temperature.
· Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach some lubrication points fast enough to prevent engine damage.
· The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage. Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature transmission wear.
· Selecting P or N when idling at a
standstill for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.
Related information
· Switching off the engine (p. 248)
3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
08
247
08 Starting and driving
Switching off the engine Switch off the engine by pressing the START/ STOP ENGINE button.
If the gear selector is not in the P position or if the vehicle is moving, press the START/ STOP ENGINE button twice or press and hold it in until the engine switches off.
Related information
· Ignition modes (p. 79)
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* introduction ERS is a feature that makes it possible to remotely start the engine using the remote key to cool or heat the passenger compartment before driving.
The climate/ and infotainment systems will start using the same settings as when the engine was switched off. When the engine is started using ERS, it will run for a maximum of 15 minutes before automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS starts, the engine must be started in the normal way before ERS can be used again.
NOTE · Always adhere to applicable State,
Province and/or Local laws regarding engine idling when using ERS.
· The service life of the remote key's
battery is affected by ERS use. If this feature is used frequently, the battery should be replaced once a year, see Remote key replacing the battery (p. 159).
WARNING
Keep the following in mind before using ERS:
· The vehicle should be in view. · The vehicle should be unoccupied. · The vehicle must not be parked
indoors or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes are harmful to the health.
Related information
· Engine Remote Start (ERS)* starting the
engine (p. 249)
· Engine Remote Start (ERS)* switching
off the engine (p. 249)
08
248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* starting the engine
1. The turn signals will flash several times. 2. The engine will start.
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* switching off the engine
3. The turn signals will illuminate for 3 seconds to indicate that the engine has started.
After the engine has started, the vehicle remains locked but the alarm is disarmed.
Active functions When the engine is started with ERS, the following functions are activated:
Any of the following will switch off the engine if it has been started with ERS:
· Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock
button (2) on the remote key
· Unlocking the vehicle · Opening a door · Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal
Remote key buttons used for remote engine start Lock
Approach lighting
· The climate control system · The infotainment system.
Deactivated functions When the engine is started with ERS, the following functions are deactivated:
· Headlights · Parking lights
· Moving the gear selector from the P posi-
tion
· If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons
(10 liters) of fuel in the tank
· More than 15 minutes have elapsed.
If the engine has been started with ERS and switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for 3 seconds.
Starting the engine The maximum range for ERS is approximately 100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is unobstructed. The vehicle must also be locked.
· License plate lights · Windshield wipers
Related information
· Engine Remote Start (ERS)* switching
Message in the instrument panel display
If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be displayed in the instrument panel.
To start the engine: 1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly. 2. Immediately press the approach lighting
button (2) for approximately 2 seconds.
off the engine (p. 249)
· Engine Remote Start (ERS)* introduction
(p. 248)
Related information
· Engine Remote Start (ERS)* introduction
(p. 248)
· Engine Remote Start (ERS)* starting the
engine (p. 249)
If the requirements for ERS have been met,
08
the following will occur:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249
08 Starting and driving
Jump starting Follow these instructions to jump start your vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle.
3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) terminal on your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a "+" sign, located under a folding cover.
4. Connect the black jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's negative () terminal (3) and to the ground point in your vehicle's engine compartment (right engine mount at the top, on the outer screw) (4).
5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, then start the engine in the vehicle with dead battery.
WARNING
· Do not connect the jumper cable to
any part of the fuel system or to any moving parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
· Batteries generate hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive.
· Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medi-
Connecting the jumper cables
G021347
6. After the engine has started, first remove the negative () terminal jumper cable (black). Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper cable (red).
cal help immediately if eyes are affected.
· Never expose the battery to open
flame or electric spark.
· Do not smoke near the battery.
If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature comple-
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
· Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to injury.
tion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle. To jump start your vehicle:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Related information
· Starting the engine (p. 246)
1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to
mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 79)).
CAUTION
2. First connect the red jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).
08
Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
250
08 Starting and driving
Transmission general information The transmission automatically shifts between the various forward gears, based on the level of acceleration and speed.
Shiftgate positions Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the gear selector between the R, N, D, and P positions. The gear selector can be moved freely between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) positions while driving.
G021351
CAUTION
The transmission's temperature is monitored to help prevent damage to the transmission or other drivetrain components. If there is a risk of overheating, the warning symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate and a text message will be displayed. Follow the instructions provided there.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)4 HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. The brakes will be released after several seconds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. Related information
· Transmission positions (p. 251) · Transmission Geartronic (p. 253) · Transmission shiftlock override (p. 255) · All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 263) · Fuel tank volume specification and vol-
ume (p. 377)
Transmission positions
Park: position P Select the P position when starting or parking.
4 Certain models only
08
}} 251
08 Starting and driving
|| Shiftlock When P has been selected, the transmission is mechanically blocked in this position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II (see Ignition modes (p. 79)) before the gear lever can be moved from the P position.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked, particularly when parking on a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is parked on an incline.
Press the control to apply the parking brake, see Parking brake general information (p. 268).
CAUTION
The vehicle must be stationary when position P is selected.
Gear indicator The gear currently being used is displayed on the right side of the instrument panel. The "S" symbol turns orange if Sport mode is being used.
Reverse: position R The vehicle must be stationary when position R is selected. Neutral: position N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started with the gear selector in this position. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N. In order to move the gear selector from the N position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II.
Related information
· Transmission general information
(p. 251)
· Transmission Geartronic (p. 253) · Transmission shiftlock override (p. 255) · Fuel tank volume specification and vol-
ume (p. 377)
Drive: position D
D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts between the various forward
gears, based on the level of acceleration and
speed. The car must be at a standstill when
08
shifting from position R to position D.
252
08 Starting and driving
Transmission Geartronic Geartronic allows you to manually shift among your vehicle's forward gears. The manual position (+S) can be selected at any time.
Geartronic: manual shifting (+S) To shift gears manually, move the gear selector to the side from D toward +S. The +S symbol in the instrument panel will change from
white to orange and the number of the gear currently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be displayed (see the following illustration)5.
· To return to automatic shifting mode from
+S, move the gear selector to the side toward D.
Gear shift indicator*
This option indicates when to shift up or down to help conserve fuel. A white arrow will appear above or below the number of the current gear to prompt the driver to shift up or down.
While driving
· If you select the manual shifting position
while driving, the gear that was being used in the Drive position will also initially be selected in the manual shifting position.
· Move the gear selector forward (toward +)
to shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward ) to shift to a lower gear.
· If you hold the gear selector toward "",
the transmission will downshift one gear at a time and will utilize the braking power of the engine. If the current speed is too high for using a lower gear, the downshift will not occur until the speed has decreased enough to allow the lower gear to be used.
· If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-
mission will automatically shift down.
In order to move the gear selector from N to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least position II, see Ignition modes (p. 79).
Shiftlock: Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel*6
08
5 If Sport mode is being used, the symbol will change to "S". 6 Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 253
08 Starting and driving
|| Geartronic: steering wheel paddles* In addition to the manual gearshift function using the gear selector, this option makes it possible to manually shift gears from the steering wheel.
Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles "": Shift down to a lower gear.
"+": Shift up to a higher gear.
In order to shift gears with the paddles, they have to first be activated. The gear selector can be in either the D or S position.
Activating the paddles:
· Pull either paddle toward the steering
wheel and release it; the D in the instru-
ment panel will change to the number of
the gear currently being used.
08
Shifting gears:
· Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel
and release it. Deactivating the paddles:
· Hold the "+" paddle for approximately
3 seconds.
NOTE
If the gear selector was in D when paddle shifting was activated (D changed to the number of the gear being used), the transmission will automatically revert to D after approximately 5 seconds if the paddles are not used to shift gears. This will not occur:
· during active driving (e.g., on a wind-
ing road, while accelerating, etc)
· if the gear selector was in S when the
paddles were activated If the transmission reverts to D, the paddles will have to be reactivated (pull either paddle toward the steering wheel and release it) before they can be used to shift gears again. The paddles can also be manually deactivated by pulling both paddles toward the steering wheel and holding them until the gear number shown in the instrument panel changes to D.
Geartronic: Sport mode (S)7 This transmission mode provides sportier shifting characteristics and enables a more active driving style by making it possible to drive at higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The engine also responds faster when the accelerator pedal is pressed.
To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the left. The transmission will not switch to manual shifting mode until the gear selector is moved forward or rearward toward + or .
Sport mode can be selected any time.
NOTE · On vehicles equipped with Sport
mode, the transmission symbol in the main instrument panel will change from D to S when the gear selector is moved to the manual shifting mode. If the gear selector is moved toward "+" or "-", the number of the gear currently being used will be displayed, see Information displays introduction (p. 68).
· Please be aware that using Sport
mode may result in a slight decrease in fuel economy. Driving in D can help improve fuel economy.
7 Certain models only
254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
Geartronic: starting on slippery surfaces Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic's manual shifting mode can help provide better traction when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector to the side from D toward +S.
Transmission shiftlock override If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example because of a dead battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position before the vehicle can be moved8.
Shiftlock override
Related information
· Transmission general information
(p. 251)
· Transmission positions (p. 251) · Transmission Geartronic (p. 253) · Fuel tank volume specification and vol-
ume (p. 377)
2. Press the gear selector forward and release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the selector forward again and release it to select 3rd gear. The optional steering wheel paddles can also be used; see the previous section "Geartronic: steering wheel paddles."
3. Release the brake pedal and press gently on the accelerator pedal.
Related information
· Transmission general information
(p. 251)
· Transmission positions (p. 251) · Transmission shiftlock override (p. 255) · Fuel tank volume specification and vol-
ume (p. 377)
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the storage compartment behind the center console to expose the small opening for overriding the shiftlock system. Insert the key blade into the opening. Press the key blade down as far as possible and keep it held down. Move the gear selector from the P posi-
tion. For information on the key blade,
see Detachable key blade general infor-
mation (p. 157).
08
8 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 250).
255
08 Starting and driving
Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When starting on steep hills, HSA (see Transmission general information (p. 251)) retains pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. The brakes will be released after several seconds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. The pedal will return to its normal position somewhat slower than normal.
Related information
· Start/Stop introduction (p. 256) · Start/Stop function (p. 256) · Start/Stop settings (p. 259) · Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 257)
· Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions
(p. 258)
· Start/Stop symbols and messages
(p. 260)
Start/Stop introduction Start/Stop is a function that temporarily switches off the engine when the vehicle is not moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at a traffic light to help reduce fuel consumption.
Start/Stop is available with certain engines/ transmissions.
Related information
· Start/Stop function (p. 256) · Start/Stop settings (p. 259) · Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 257)
· Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions
(p. 258)
· Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 256)
· Start/Stop symbols and messages
(p. 260)
Start/Stop function Function and use
Start/Stop symbol in the instrument panel
Start/Stop button on the center console Start/Stop is activated automatically each time the engine is started9. The symbol in the instrument panel will be displayed for several seconds when the engine starts and the indicator light in the On/Off button will remain illuminated while the function is activated. All of the vehicle's systems will function while the engine is auto-stopped, although the function of certain systems may reduced at this time. For example, blower speed and high infotainment system volume may be reduced to help conserve the battery's capacity.
08
9 Not when the engine is started using the optional Engine Remote Start feature, Starting the engine (p. 246)
256
08 Starting and driving
Auto-stopping the engine Normally, when Start/Stop is activated and the brakes are applied until the vehicle comes to a standstill, the engine will auto-stop automatically if the driver keeps the brake pedal depressed.
To remind the driver that the engine has been auto-stopped, the Start/Stop symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and remain on until the engine restarts.
If the ECO function* (ECO* (p. 261)) is activated, the engine may auto-stop before the vehicle comes to a complete standstill.
Auto-starting the engine The engine restarts as soon as the driver releases the brake pedal. Deactivating Start/Stop
In certain situations (e.g., driving in heavy, stop-and-go traffic), it may be preferable to deactivate Start/Stop. This is done by pressing the button in the center console. The indicator light in the button will go out. Start/Stop will remain deactivated until the button is pressed again or until the engine is switched off and restarted by the driver.
Related information
· Start/Stop introduction (p. 256) · Start/Stop settings (p. 259) · Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 257)
· Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions
(p. 258)
· Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 256)
· Start/Stop symbols and messages
(p. 260)
Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions In certain situations or conditions, the engine may not auto-stop when the vehicle comes to a standstill, such as if:
Condition/situation The vehicle's speed has not reached a speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h) after the most recent auto-start or after the driver has started the engine. The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt. The main battery's charge is below the minimum level. The engine has not reached its normal operating temperature. The ambient temperature is below approx. 25°F (-4°C) or above approx. 85°F (30°C). The windshield's heating function* is activated. The climate system cannot keep the desired settings in the passenger compartment; the blower will operate at high speed. The vehicle is backing up.
08 The main battery's temperature is below freezing or too high.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 257
08 Starting and driving
|| Condition/situation
The driver is turning the steering wheel hard.
The road's incline is very steep.
A trailer's electrical system is connected to the vehicle.
The hood has been openedA.
The transmission has not reached its normal operating temperature.
Atmospheric pressure is below a level equivalent to an altitude of approx. 4,900 8,200 ft (15002500 m) above sea level. The actual pressure is also affected by current weather conditions.
The Adaptive Cruise Control's* Queue Assist feature is activated.
The gear selector is in the SB or "+/" position.
A Certain engines only B Sport mode (where applicable)
Related information
· Start/Stop introduction (p. 256)
· Start/Stop function (p. 256)
08
· Start/Stop settings (p. 259)
· Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions
(p. 258)
· Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 256)
· Start/Stop symbols and messages
(p. 260)
258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions In certain situations or conditions, the engine may auto-start even though the driver is still pressing the brake pedal, such as if:
Condition/situation
Condensation forms on the windows. The climate system cannot keep the desired settings in the passenger compartment. Electrical current consumption is temporarily high or the main battery's charge is below the minimum level. The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly. The hood has been openedA. The vehicle begins to move or increases speed slightly (if the engine auto-stopped before the vehicle was at a standstill (see ECO* (p. 261))). The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt while the gear selector is in the D or N positions. The steering wheel is turnedA.
Condition/situation
The gear selector is moved from D to SB, R or "+/". The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D an audible signal and a text message will inform the driver that Start/Stop is active.
A Certain engines only B Sport mode (where applicable)
WARNING
Do not open the hood if the engine has auto-stopped. The engine could suddenly auto-start. Before opening the hood:
· Switch off the ignition using the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
· Be aware that if the engine has been
running, components in the engine compartment will be very hot.
If the engine does not auto-start, this could be due to:
· The driver's seat belt is not fastened · The gear selector is in P and the driver's
door is opened In these cases, the driver will have to restart the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Related information
· Start/Stop introduction (p. 256) · Start/Stop function (p. 256) · Start/Stop settings (p. 259) · Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 257)
· Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 256)
· Start/Stop symbols and messages
(p. 260)
08 Starting and driving
Start/Stop settings Settings for the Start/Stop function can be made in the MY CAR menu system.
Related information
· Start/Stop introduction (p. 256) · Start/Stop function (p. 256) · Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 257)
· Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions
(p. 258)
· Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 256)
· Start/Stop symbols and messages
(p. 260) 08
259
08 Starting and driving
Start/Stop symbols and messages
Text messages Combined with the information symbol in the instrument panel, the
Start/Stop function may also display messages in certain situations. Follow the instructions provided in the message. The following table gives several examples.
Symbol Message Auto Start/Stop Service required
Information/action Start/Stop is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Autostart Engine running + an This is triggered if the driver's door is opened while the engine is auto-stopped. audible signal
-
Press Start button
-
Select P or N to start
-
Press Start button
The engine will not auto-start. Start the engine normally by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button. Start/Stop has been deactivated. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button. The engine will not auto-start. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.
If the message does not disappear after the suggested action has been taken, contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
08
Related information
· Start/Stop introduction (p. 256)
· Start/Stop function (p. 256)
· Start/Stop settings (p. 259) · Start/Stop Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 257)
· Start/Stop Auto-start exceptions
(p. 258)
· Start/Stop Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 256)
260
08 Starting and driving
ECO* Eco is a function10 developed by Volvo to give the driver the opportunity to actively drive more economically and to help reduce fuel consumption.
Introduction
When Eco is activated, the following functions are modified:
NOTE
When Eco is activated, several climate system parameters are changed and the function of certain current-consuming systems will be reduced. Some of these functions can be restarted manually but full functionality will not be restored until Eco is deactivated.
Function
The ECO symbol will be displayed in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the ECO button will be on when Eco is activated.
Eco on or off When ECO is deactivated, the ECO symbol will not be displayed in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the ECO button will be off. The function will remain deactivated until the button is pressed again.
· The automatic transmission's shifting
points
Eco Coast Eco Coast is an integral part of the Eco func-
· The engine management system and
accelerator pedal response
tion and essentially deactivates engine braking, allowing the vehicle to roll freely.
· Stop/stop function (Start/Stop introduc-
tion (p. 256)): the engine can auto-stop
NOTE
before the vehicle has come to a full stop
· Eco Coast functionality is activated:
engine braking is disabled
To function optimally, Eco Coast should primarily be used when the vehicle can coast as far as possible.
· Climate system settings: certain functions
(e.g., air conditioning) will be temporarily reduced or deactivated
ECO On/Off button in the center console ECO symbol in the instrument panel
When the driver releases the accelerator pedal, the transmission is automatically dis-
When the engine is switched off, ECO is deactivated and must be reactivated each time the engine is started (with the exception of certain engines).
engaged from the engine and engine rpm will be reduced to the idle level (approx. 700-800 rpm), which helps reduce fuel consumption.
08
10 Option on models equipped with certain 4-cylinder engines
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 261
08 Starting and driving
||
This feature is primarily intended to be used
· The vehicle's speed is between approxi-
· The engine and/or transmission have not
in driving situations where a decrease in
mately 4085 mph (65140 km/h). Always
reached their normal operating tempera-
speed is expected, such as when approach-
observe posted speed limits
ture
ing an intersection or a traffic light.
· The gradient of a down-slope is less than
· The gear selector is moved from D to the
Eco Coast enables proactive driving with as little braking as possible.
approximately 6% Deactivating Eco Coast
manual "S+/" position
· The vehicle's speed is not within the
Combinations of On and Off Depending on the driving situation, Eco can be used in different ways to help reduce fuel
In certain situations, it may be advisable to switch off the Eco Coast function, such as:
· When driving down steep hills, in order to
4085 mph (65140 km/h). interval Additional information and settings
consumption:
utilize engine braking
· With Eco activated: this enables Eco
Coast, which allows the vehicle to roll
· Prior to passing another vehicle, in order
to do so as safely as possible
freely for as far as possible when the
Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivating
driver releases the accelerator pedal (e.g., engine braking) can be done in the following
when approaching a traffic light or intersection). or
ways:
· Press the ECO button on the center con-
sole
· With Eco deactivated: engine braking
can be used when the vehicle will only roll for a short distance (in heavy traffic, etc.) or when driving down hills. To help keep fuel consumption as low as possible, Eco Coast should not be used in
· Move the gear selector to the manual "S
+/" position
· Change gears using the steering wheel
paddles*
· Press the brake or accelerator pedal
Other ECO-related settings can be made in the vehicle's MY CAR menu. See My Car introduction (p. 76) for more information.
traffic situations where the brakes have to be used frequently.
Activating Eco Coast Eco Coast is activated when the accelerator pedal is released completely if:
Eco Coast limitations This function will not be available if:
· Cruise control is activated · The gradient of a down-slope is more
than approximately 6%
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124) · Transmission general information
(p. 251)
08
· Eco is activated
· The steering wheel paddles* are used to
· The gear selector is in D
manually change gears
262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent All Wheel Drive, which means that power is distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels.
Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction.
NOTE The message AWD disabled Service required will be appear in the information
display if an electrical fault should occur in the AWD system. A warning light will also illuminate in the instrument panel. If this occurs, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Related information
· Transmission general information
(p. 251)
· Hill Descent Control (HDC) introduction
(p. 263)
Hill Descent Control (HDC)12 introduction HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and makes it possible to increase or decrease the vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without applying the brakes. The brake system functions automatically to maintain a low and steady speed.
Introduction Normally, when the accelerator pedal is released while driving down hills, the vehicle's speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm (the normal engine braking effect). However, if the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases despite the engine braking effect. In this situation, the brakes must be applied to reduce the vehicle's speed. HDC is particularly useful when driving down steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the road may have slippery patches.
WARNING
HDC does not function in all situations, and is a supplementary braking aid. The driver has full responsibility for driving in a safe manner.
08
12 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.
}} 263
08 Starting and driving
|| Related information
· Hill Descent Control (HDC) operation
(p. 264)
· Brakes general (p. 265)
08
Hill Descent Control (HDC)14 operation Function
· HDC can be switched on and off with the
button in the center console. An indicator
light in the button illuminates when HDC
is activated.
· The indicator light
in the instrument
panel illuminates and a message is dis-
played when the system is controlling the
vehicle's speed.
· HDC only functions when first or reverse
gears are selected (1 will be shown in the
instrument panel display when first gear
is selected).
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector is the D position.
Using HDC HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph (7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator pedal can be used to select any speed that is possible in first or reverse gears. When the accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph (7 km/h), depending on the gear selected, regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not necessary to apply the brakes.
· The brake lights illuminate automatically
when HDC is controlling the vehicle's speed.
· The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at
any time by applying the brakes. HDC is deactivated when:
· The button on the center console is
pressed
· A gear higher than first gear is selected · D is selected on vehicles with an auto-
matic transmission HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is done while driving down a steep hill, the system's braking effect will decrease gradually.
14 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.
264
08 Starting and driving
NOTE
Engine response to pressure on the accelerator pedal may be slightly slower than normal when HDC is activated.
Related information
· Hill Descent Control (HDC) introduction
(p. 263)
· Brakes general (p. 265)
Brakes general The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in one of these circuits, it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake circuit.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther than normal and requires greater foot pressure, the stopping distance will be longer. A warning light in the instrument panel will light up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. If this light comes on while driving or braking, stop immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.
NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain pressure on the pedal do not pump the brakes.
Brake pad inspection On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition of the brake pads can be checked by raising the vehicle (see Changing a wheel removing wheel (p. 291) for information about using the jack and removing a wheel) and performing a visual inspection of the brake pads.
WARNING · If the vehicle has been driven immedi-
ately prior to a brake pad inspection, the wheel hub, brake components, etc., will be very hot. Allow time for these components to cool before carrying out the inspection.
· Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.
· Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 265
08 Starting and driving
||
WARNING
· Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle.
· The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.
· Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,
non-slippery surface.
· No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment
Water on brake discs and brake pads affects braking
Driving in rain and slush or passing through an automatic car wash can cause water to collect on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a delay in braking effect when the pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay when the brakes are needed, depress the pedal occasionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. This will remove the water from the brakes. Check that brake application feels normal. This should also be done after washing or starting in very damp or cold weather.
braking gently for a short period while the vehicle is moving.
Related information
· Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
· Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)
(p. 268)
· Brakes general (p. 265) · Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 267) · Hill Descent Control (HDC) introduction
(p. 263)
bar on the vehicle.
· The jack must correctly engage the
jack attachment.
· Never allow any part of your body to
be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack.
Severe strain on the brake system The brakes will be subject to severe strain when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually slower, which means that the cooling of the brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the
Power brakes function only when the
brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the
engine is running The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure which is only created when the engine is run-
engine help with the braking. Do not forget that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to a greater than normal load.
ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the engine switched off.
Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
If the power brakes are not working, consid-
may result in delayed brake function. This
erably higher pressure will be required on the
delay is minimized by cleaning the brake lin-
brake pedal to compensate for the lack of
ings.
08
power assistance. This can happen for example when towing your vehicle or if the engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The brake pedal feels harder than usual.
Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the vehicle has been washed. Do this by
266
08 Starting and driving
Brakes symbols
Symbols in the instrument panel Symbol Specification Steady glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss. Automatic function check: steady glow for two seconds when the engine is started.
WARNING
If
and
come on at the
same time and the brake level is below the
MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake sys-
tem-related message is shown in the infor-
mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the
vehicle towed to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician and have the
brake system inspected.
Related information
· Brakes general (p. 265) · Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) The ABS system helps to improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) during severe braking conditions by limiting brake lockup.
When the system "senses" impending lockup, braking pressure is automatically modulated in order to help prevent lockup that could lead to a skid. The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module, which is normal.
Related information
· Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
· Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)
(p. 268)
· Brakes general (p. 265)
Brake lights The brake lights come on automatically when the brakes are applied.
Adaptive brake lights The adaptive brake lights activate in the event of sudden braking or if the ABS system is activated. This function causes an additional taillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help alert vehicles traveling behind.
The adaptive brake lights activate if:
· The ABS system activates for more than
approximately a half second
· In the event of sudden braking while the
vehicle is moving at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake lights and additional taillights remain on for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or until braking force on the vehicle is reduced.
Related information
· Brakes general (p. 265) · Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
08
267
08 Starting and driving
Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) EBA is designed to provide full brake effect immediately in the event of sudden, hard braking.
Emergency Brake Assistance The EBA system is activated by the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed.
When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released.
Related information
· Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
· Brakes general (p. 265) · Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 267)
NOTE
· When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately
increases to the maximum level. You
must maintain full pressure on the
brake pedal in order to utilize the sys-
tem completely. There will be no brak-
ing effect if the pedal is released. EBA
is automatically deactivated when the
brake pedal is released.
· When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
08
started. This is normal and the pedal
will return to its usual position when it
is released.
Parking brake general information The electric parking brake helps to keep the vehicle stationary when it is parked. Electric parking brake
Parking brake control
NOTE · A faint sound from the parking brake's
electric motor can be heard when the parking brake is being applied. This sound can also be heard during the automatic function check of the parking brake.
· The brake pedal will move slightly
when the electric parking brake is applied or released. Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low, the parking brake cannot be applied or released.
268
08 Starting and driving
Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 250).
Parking on a hill
· If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the
front wheels so that they point away from the curb.
· If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the curb. The parking brake should also be applied.
Related information
· Parking brake applying (p. 269) · Parking brake releasing (p. 270) · Parking brake symbols and messages
(p. 271)
· Brakes general (p. 265)
Parking brake applying Applying the electric parking brake
Parking brake control
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Push the control.
> The
symbol in the instrument
panel flashes while the parking brake is
being applied and glows steadily when
the parking brake has been fully
applied.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.
NOTE · In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving by holding in the control. Braking will be interrupted when the accelerator pedal is depressed or the control is released.
· An audible signal will sound during this
procedure if the vehicle is moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
Related information
· Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
· Parking brake releasing (p. 270) · Parking brake symbols and messages
(p. 271)
· Brakes general (p. 265)
08
269
08 Starting and driving
Parking brake releasing Releasing the electric parking brake
NOTE
· For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seat belt.
· The electric parking brake will be
released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.
· Parking brake symbols and messages
(p. 271)
· Brakes general (p. 265)
2. Fasten the seat belt.
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and press the accelerator pedal. The
Parking brake control
Manual release 1. Fasten the seat belt.
parking brake will release when the vehicle begins to move.
Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and press the START/STOP ENGINE button (or press the START/STOP ENGINE button with a valid remote key in the passenger compartment on vehicles with the optional keyless drive).
vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. To help avoid this: 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever
pushed in with the left hand while shifting into Drive with the right.
3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to
4. Pull the parking brake control. Automatic release
pull away, release the parking brake lever only after the vehicle begins to move.
1. Start the engine. 08
Related information
· Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
· Parking brake applying (p. 269)
270
08 Starting and driving
Parking brake symbols and messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol and messages in the instrument panel
Symbol Message
Description/action
"Message"
Read the message in the information display
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
-
Park brake not
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it sev-
fully released
eral times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error mes-
sage showing, a warning signal sounds.
-
Parking brake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several
applied
times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message
showing, a warning signal sounds.
-
Parking brake
A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains
Service required
WARNING
If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so
Related information
· Parking brake general information
(p. 268)
· Parking brake applying (p. 269)
that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill.
· Parking brake releasing (p. 270) · Brakes general (p. 265)
08
271
08 Starting and driving
Driving through water The vehicle should be driven with extreme caution if it is necessary to drive through standing water. The vehicle can be driven through water up to a depth of approximately 11 in. (30 cm) at walking speed to help prevent water from entering the differential and the transmission. Water reduces the oil's lubricating capacity and may shorten the service life of these components. · Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.
· Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water.
· When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
08
WARNING
· Avoid driving through standing or
rushing water. Doing so can be dangerous and it may also be difficult to determine the actual depth of the water.
· If water cannot be avoided, after driv-
ing through the water, press lightly on the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are functioning normally. Water or mud can make the brake linings slippery, resulting in delayed braking effect.
CAUTION · Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.
· If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than approximately 11 in. (30 cm), water may enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating capacity and may shorten the service life of these components.
· Damage to any components, the
engine, transmission, turbo-charger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is not covered under warranty.
· Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions.
· If the engine has been stopped while
the vehicle is in water, do not attempt to restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of the water.
Related information
· Towing the vehicle (p. 284) · Towing by tow truck (p. 285)
272
08 Starting and driving
Engine and cooling system
Conserving electrical current
Before a long distance trip
Under special conditions, for example when driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and cooling system will overheat. Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the engine.
· Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep hills. For information, see Towing a trailer (p. 281)
· Do not turn the engine off immediately
when stopping after a hard drive.
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.
· Remove any auxiliary lights from in front
of the grille when driving in hot weather conditions.
· Do not exceed engine speeds of
4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil temperature could become too high.
Keep the following in mind to help minimize battery drain:
· When the engine is not running, avoid
using ignition mode II. Many electrical systems (the audio system, the optional navigation system, power windows, etc) will function in ignition modes 0 and I. These modes reduce drain on the battery.
· Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc., that consume a great deal of current when the engine is not running could result in the battery being completely drained. Driving or having the engine running for approximately 15 minutes will help keep the battery charged.
· The optional 12-volt socket in the cargo
area (p. 141) area provides electrical current even with the ignition switched off, which drains the battery.
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances. Your retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event that problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be checked before any long trip:
· Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.
· Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage. · Have the transmission oil level (p. 377)
checked.
· Check condition of drive belts. · Check state of the battery's charge. · Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn (p. 290). Check tire pressure (p. 297).
· The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
· Check all lights, including high beams.
· Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
· Have a word with a trained and qualified
08
Volvo service technician if you intend to
}} 273
08 Starting and driving
||
drive in countries where it may be difficult Driving in cold weather
therefore advisable to check the state of
to obtain the correct fuel.
· Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice are likely to occur, consider snow
Check your vehicle before the approach of cold weather. The following advice is worth noting:
charge more frequently and spray an antirust oil on the battery posts.
· Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving, see
tires (p. 305).
Related information
· Changing a wheel removing wheel
(p. 291)
· Bulbs introduction (p. 334)
· Make sure that the engine cool-
ant (p. 331) contains 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture will reduce freeze protection. This gives protection against freezing down to 31 °F (35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must not be mixed.
Snow tires/studded tires (p. 305).
· To prevent the washer fluid (p. 344)reser-
voir from freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often splashed on the windshield during winter driving, requiring the frequent use of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted
· Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
· Try to keep the fuel tank well filled this
helps prevent the formation of condensation in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to add fuel line de-icer before refueling.
· The viscosity of the engine oil is impor-
tant. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves cold-weather starting as well as
as follows: Down to 14 °F (10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (15 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water Down to 18 °F (28 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.
· Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. · Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.
decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is warming up. Full synthetic
0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in areas with sustained low temperatures.
· The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield
wipers, lighting, etc., are used more
08
often. Moreover, the capacity of the bat-
tery decreases as the temperature drops.
In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is
274
08 Starting and driving
Refueling fuel requirements Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits.
Deposit control gasoline (detergent additives) Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure whether the gasoline contains deposit control additives, check with the service station operator.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of external fuel injector cleaning systems.
result in loss of emission warranty coverage. State and local vehicle inspection programs will make detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test failure for misfueled vehicles.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please return your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for service.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings (p. 276) listed must still be met.
Alcohol Ethanol Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15% MTBE may be used.
Methanol Do not use gasolines containing methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Unleaded fuel
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic con-
"Oxygenated fuels"
verter and must use only unleaded gasoline.
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
U.S. and Canadian regulations require that
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps
require that the service pump be marked indi-
have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler
cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel
there are areas in which the pumps are
into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
only". Leaded gasoline damages the three-
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,
way catalytic converter and the heated oxy-
check with the service station operator. To
gen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded
meet seasonal air quality standards, some
gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the
areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
08
emission control system (p. 279) and could
275
08 Starting and driving
Refueling octane rating Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane17 or above will not affect engine reliability.
Minimum octane
ard jointly established by leading automotive manufactures to meet the needs of today's advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met the "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards.
NOTE
Fuel Formulations Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Information about TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is available at www.toptiergas.com.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include:
Typical pump octane label
NOTE
Vehicles equipped with the high performance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 and B4204T10) require premium fuel18.
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Volvo endorses the use of "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" where available to help maintain engine performance and reliability. TOP
G028920
Demanding driving In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully utilize your engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation.
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a difference in engine operation is noticeable.
· standing upwind away from the filler noz-
zle while refueling
· refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of the filler neck during refueling
· wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
Use of Additives With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some of these additives contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals.
08
TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand-
17 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2. 18 Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information.
276
08 Starting and driving
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings, this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and injury.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger compartment is ventilated, and immediately return the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for correction.
Related information
· Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275)
Refueling opening/closing fuel filler door
The fuel filler door is located on the right rear fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel
tank symbol on the information display
)
With the ignition switched off, press and release the button on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks.
· If you intend to leave your vehicle while it
is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked.
· You can also keep the vehicle locked if
you remain inside it during refueling. The central locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.
· Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstruc-
ted and is completely closed after refueling.
· Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather. Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click indicates that it is closed.
CAUTION
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause damage to painted surfaces, which may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Manually opening the fuel filler door
1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (on
08
the same side as the fuel filler door).
2. Grasp the handle on the green cord.
}} 277
08 Starting and driving
|| 3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until
the fuel filler door clicks open.
Related information
· Refueling opening/closing fuel cap
(p. 278)
· Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275) · Refueling octane rating (p. 276)
Refueling opening/closing fuel cap If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened manually.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
G022915
Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the filler cap slowly. After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.
CAUTION · Do not refuel with the engine run-
ning19. Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the ignition is on, an incorrect reading could occur in the fuel gauge.
· Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle more than one extra time. Too much fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the emission control systems.
Related information
· Refueling fuel requirements (p. 275) · Refueling octane rating (p. 276)
08
19 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.
278
08 Starting and driving
Emission controls
Three-way catalytic converter
· Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems, may cause unusually high threeway catalytic converter temperatures. Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter.
· Do not park your vehicle over combusti-
ble materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under certain wind and weather conditions.
· Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.
· Remember that tampering or unauthor-
ized modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This includes: altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system components or location
or removing components, and/or repeated use of leaded fuel.
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters.
Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions. Related information
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
· Engine and cooling system (p. 273)
Economical driving Better driving economy may be obtained by thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to immediate traffic conditions. Economical driving conserves natural resources Observe the following rules: · Bring the engine to normal operating tem-
perature as soon as possible by driving with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for the first few minutes of operation. A cold engine uses more fuel and is subject to increased wear.
· Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi-
cle for driving short distances. This does not allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
· Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera-
tion and hard braking.
· Use the transmission's Drive (D) position
as often as possible and avoid using kickdown.
08
}} 279
08 Starting and driving
||
· Using the engine's optional Eco func-
· Dirty air cleaner
with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in
tion20 can help improve fuel economy. For additional information, see ECO* (p. 261).
· Using the transmission's Sport mode21
may increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use the transmission's Drive (D) position as often as possible. For additional information about Sport mode, see
· Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter · Dragging brakes · Incorrect front end alignment
Some of the above mentioned items and others are checked at the standard maintenance intervals.
the cargo area, the less the tendency to understeer.
· Vehicle load, tire design and inflation
pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check that the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure according to the vehicle load. Loads should be dis-
Transmission Geartronic (p. 253).
tributed so that capacity weight or maxi-
· Do not exceed posted speed limits. · Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.
· Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).
· Remove snow tires when threat of snow
WARNING
Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with the tailgate open could lead to poisonous exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment. If the tailgate must be kept open for any reason, proceed as follows:
mum permissible axle loads are not exceeded.
· At the specified curb weight your vehicle
has a tendency to understeer, which means that the steering wheel has to be turned more than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend. This ensures
or ice has ended.
· Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel consumption.
· At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-
tion will be lower with the air conditioning
· Close the windows · Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side windows and the blower control to its highest setting.
good stability and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these properties can alter with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in the cargo compartment, the less the tendency to understeer.
on and the windows closed than with the air conditioning off and the windows open.
· Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn how to drive more economically.
Handling and roadholding At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a tendency to understeer, which means that the steering wheel has to be turned more than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend. This ensures good stability
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
Other factors that decrease gas mileage are: 08
and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these properties can alter
20 Available on certain 4-cyl. engines 21 Models with the T6 turbo engine only.
280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer When towing a trailer, always observe the legal requirements of the state/province.
NOTE
For the maximum trailer and tongue weights recommended by Volvo, see Weights (p. 372).
· All Volvo models are equipped with
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not interfere with the proper operation of this bumper system. Trailer towing does not normally present any particular problems, but take into consideration:
· Increase tire pressure to recommended
full pressure, see Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300).
· When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km).
· Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).
· Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle enters the red range.
· If the automatic transmission begins to
overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window.
· Avoid overload and other abusive opera-
tion.
· Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-
ity, and economy.
· It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe stop (check and observe state/ local regulations).
· Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.
· More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.
· Remove the ball holder when the hitch is
not being used.
NOTE · When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in P. Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking.
· When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the parking brake.
· If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make sure the gear you select does not put too much strain on the engine (using too high a gear).
· The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch
may be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights.
· Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines
of more than 15%.
08
}} 281
08 Starting and driving
|| CAUTION
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft (1000 m) above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the car's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density, so the maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer must be reduced by 10% for every further 3,280 ft (1000 m) (or part thereof). When towing 5,950 lbs (2,700kg) hill inclination is restricted to 14%.
08
WARNING · Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should safety chains be attached to the bumper.
· Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.
· Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle brake system, nor a trailer's lighting system directly to the vehicle lighting system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installation.
· When towing a trailer, the trailer's
safety chains or wire must be correctly fastened to the attachment points provided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety chain or wire must never be fastened to or wound around the towing ball.
Trailer cable An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
Related information
· Detachable trailer hitch (p. 282) · Loading general (p. 142)
Detachable trailer hitch Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer hitches that are specially designed for the vehicle.
C
DE B
A Ball holder Locking bolt Cotter pin Hitch assembly Safety wire attachment Installing the ball holder 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly. 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.
G010496
282
08 Starting and driving
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly.
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt.
Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking
bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder/hitch assembly.
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway and is part of the stability system. For information on the stability system, see Stability system introduction (p. 175)
Function A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer
· TSA may not intervene when the vehicle
and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly
How TSA works Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult to stop, which makes it difficult to control the vehicle and trailer. The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral movement. If the system detects a tendency
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.
is overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds between approximately 45-55 mph
to sway, the brakes are applied individually on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often
NOTE
A cover for the hitch assembly is also included in the kit.
Related information
· Towing a trailer (p. 281)
(70-90 km/h).
Swaying may be caused by factors such as:
· The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sud-
den, strong crosswind
· The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an
uneven road surface or drive over a bump
· Sudden movements of the steering wheel
enough to enable the driver to regain control of the vehicle. If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion, the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer
Facts about TSA
· TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi-
mately 40 mph (60 km/h)
have once again become stable, TSA will now stop regulating the brakes/engine power and the driver regains control of the vehicle.
· The stability system symbol in the instru-
ment panel will flash when TSA is working
Related information
· Towing a trailer (p. 281)
· If the driver switches off the stability sys-
· Loading general (p. 142)
tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also
08
be switched off (but will be on again the
next time the engine is started)
283
08 Starting and driving
Towing the vehicle Always check with state and local authorities before attempting to tow another vehicle because this type of towing is subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of towing device, lighting, etc.
1. With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot22, press START/STOP ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to activate ignition mode II.
2. The remote key must remain in the ignition slot23 for the entire time that the vehicle is being towed.
3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing vehicle slows down by applying light pressure on the brake pedal. This will help prevent jarring movements of the vehicle being towed.
4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the vehicle being towed.
CAUTION
General towing precautions:
· Please check with state and local
authorities before attempting this type of towing, as vehicles being towed are subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of towing device, lighting, etc.
· If the vehicle's battery is dead, see
Jump starting (p. 250) to provide current for releasing the electric parking brake and to move the gear selector from the P position to N. If this is not possible, see Transmission shiftlock override (p. 255) for information about manually overriding the shiftlock system to move the gear selector from P to N.
· Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable towing speed.
· Maximum distance with front wheels
on ground: 50 miles (80 km).
· The vehicle should only be towed in
the forward direction.
Related information
· Towing eyelet (p. 284)
08
· Remote key functions (p. 155)
22 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive. 23 For vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.
284
Towing eyelet When used, the towing eyelet should always be securing attached.
Attaching the towing eyelet
08 Starting and driving
Attaching the towing eyelet The towing eyelet is located under the floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire. This eyelet must be screwed into the positions provided on the right sides of either the front or rear bumper (see illustration).
There are two different types of covers over the openings for the towing eyelet and they have to be opened differently.
· If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,
etc., into the notch and pry open the edge of the cover. Open the cover completely and remove it.
· If the cover has a mark along one edge
or in a corner, press the mark while prying out the opposite side/corner using a coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it.
Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet should be removed and returned to its storage location.
Press the cover for the attachment point back into position.
WARNING · When the vehicle is being towed, the
ignition should be in mode II (in mode I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deactivated). For more information, see Ignition modes (p. 79)
· Never remove the remote key from the
ignition slot when the vehicle is being towed. For vehicles with keyless drive, the remote key must remain inside the vehicle.
· The power brakes and power steering
will not function when the engine is not running. Approximately 5 times more pressure will be required on the brake pedal and the steering wheel will be considerably harder to turn.
· The towing eyelets must not be used
for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving severe strain.
Related information
· Towing the vehicle (p. 284) · Towing by tow truck (p. 285)
Towing by tow truck When necessary, call for professional help from an authorized towing company. Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment.
CAUTION
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet may be used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck.
· The vehicle's position and ground
clearance determine if it can be pulled up onto a flatbed tow truck using the towing eyelet.
· If the angle of the tow truck's ramp is
too steep or the ground clearance under the vehicle is insufficient, damage could occur by attempting to pull the vehicle using the towing eyelet.
· If necessary, lift the vehicle using the
tow truck's lifting device.
WARNING
No person or object should be behind the tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto the flatbed.
08
}} 285
08 Starting and driving
|| CAUTION
· The vehicle should always be towed in
the forward direction.
· Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*
that are being towed with the front wheels off the ground should not be towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be towed farther than 30 miles (50 km). Related information
· Towing eyelet (p. 284)
08
286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WHEELS AND TIRES
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tires general information
However, for optimum road holding on icy or
Related information
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on all four wheels.
· Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300) · Tire specifications (p. 298)
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). Introduction
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires are the same size designation, type (radial) and preferably from the same manufacturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering the car's roadholding and
· Changing a wheel direction of rotation
(p. 291)
· Tires tread wear indicator (p. 290)
CAUTION
handling characteristics.
Some Volvo models are equipped with an Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry pavement performance with con-
Tire rotation Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire wear is affected by a number of factors such as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving
sideration for hydroplaning resistance.
style, etc.
They may be more susceptible to road
hazard damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve a tread life of less
NOTE
than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo's advanced AWD or stability system, these tires are not designed for winter driving, and should be replaced with winter tires when weather conditions dictate.
· If the tires are rotated, they should
only be moved from front to rear or vice versa. They should never be rotated left to right/right to left.
· Ideally, tire rotation should be done the
first time after approximately 3,000
The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces.
miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some customers find that tire rotation may help to get extra mileage from tire life.
· Tire rotation should only be performed
Most models are equipped with "all-season"
if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and
tires, which provide a somewhat higher
tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).
degree of road holding on slippery surfaces
than tires without the "all-season" rating.
288
09 Wheels and tires
Tires storage and age
process. The temporary spare1 should also
WARNING
09
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on rims), they should be suspended off the floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been used. A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
· The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability and handling requirements. Unap-
New Tires
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration should be replaced immediately. Storing wheels and tires
proved wheel/tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling.
· Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
When storing completes wheels (tires moun-
tions will not be covered by your new
ted on rims), they should be suspended off
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
the floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
responsibility for death, injury, or
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on their sides or standing upright, but should
expenses that may result from such installations.
not be suspended.
Related information
CAUTION
· Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300)
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of 2000, the manufacturing week and year (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513 means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2013).
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, dry, dark place, and should never be stored in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.
· Tire specifications (p. 298) · Tire specifications (p. 298) · Changing a wheel direction of rotation
(p. 291)
· Tires tread wear indicator (p. 290)
Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging
1 Option or accessory on some models
289
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tires tread wear indicator The tires have wear indicator strips running across or parallel to the tread.
· Changing a wheel direction of rotation
(p. 291)
· Tires storage and age (p. 289)
G021829
The letters TWI are printed on the side of the tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction. When replacing worn tires, it is recommended that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle. Related information
· Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300) · Tire specifications (p. 298)
Tires tire economy A smooth driving style and correct inflation pressure can help prolong the tires' service life.
· Maintain correct tire pressure. The tire
inflation table, see Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300).
· Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire
screeching.
· Tire wear increases with speed. · Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.
· Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.
· Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
· When replacing tires, the tires with the
most tread should be mounted on the rear wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer during hard braking.
· Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
290
Changing a wheel direction of rotation Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's braking properties and ability to force aside rain, snow and slush.
Summer and winter tires
Related information
· Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300) · Tire specifications (p. 298) · Tires storage and age (p. 289) · Tires tread wear indicator (p. 290)
09 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel removing wheel
09
Wheel changes should always be carried out correctly.
G021778 G017464
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire
· The tires with the most tread should
always be on the rear axle (to help reduce the risk of skidding).
· When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate where they were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear
· Tires with tread designed to roll in only
one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall.
· Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
unsure about the tread depth.
Location of jack and tools
Changing a wheel 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in P. 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool
for removing the plastic covers on the wheel nuts, the towing eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool (certain models only) stowed under the floor of the cargo area.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 291
09 Wheels and tires
||
09
3.
Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel nuts
Remove the wheel cover (where applicable) using the removal tool or remove the wheel cover by hand. 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground with wooden blocks or large stones.
Lug wrench and towing eyelet 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug
wrench as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
The towing eyelet must be screwed into the lug wrench as far as possible.
6. With the vehicle still on the ground, remove the plastic covers on the wheel nuts with the tool provided and use the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the wheel nuts ½ 1 turn by exerting downward (counterclockwise) pressure.
Jack attachment points
292
09 Wheels and tires
7. There are two jack attachment points on
WARNING
NOTE
09
each side of the vehicle. Position the jack under the attachment point to be used on a level, firm, non-slippery surface and crank it up until it is correctly aligned and seated in the attachment point. Before raising the vehicle, check that the jack is
· The jack must correctly engage the
jack attachment.
· Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,
non-slippery surface.
· Never allow any part of your body to
The jack provided with your vehicle is intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your particular model should be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be
still correctly positioned in the attachment. 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is lifted off the ground.
be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack.
· Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other
lifted more frequently or for a prolonged period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device's instructions for use.
9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and remove the wheel.
job, use stands to support the vehicle.
· Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.
· Block the wheels standing on the
Related information
· Changing a wheel installing a wheel
(p. 295)
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.
· The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be dam-
aged.
· No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle.
293
09 Wheels and tires
09 Changing a wheel spare wheel Wheel changes should always be carried out correctly.
Spare tire The spare tire in your vehicle2 is called a
Spare wheel The spare wheel is only intended for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire pressure for the spare wheel is
Related information
· Changing a wheel installing a wheel
(p. 295)
· Changing a wheel removing wheel
(p. 291)
"Temporary Spare".
stated in the tire pressure table, see Tire infla-
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on.
tion pressure table (p. 300) and in the tire inflation placard on the driver's side door jamb at the rear of the driver's door opening.
WARNING
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use.
CAUTION
The vehicle must never be driven with more than one temporary spare wheel.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the rim side down. There are two foam blocks, one under the spare wheel and one over/inside. The upper one contains all tools. The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam blocks.
2 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.
294
09 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel accessing the spare wheel The following procedure explains how to access the spare wheel (where applicable).
1. Open the floor hatch.
Changing a wheel installing a wheel Related information
09
It is important to re-install wheels properly.
· Changing a wheel spare wheel (p. 294)
Re-installing the wheel 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
· Changing a wheel removing wheel
(p. 291)
and hub.
2. Undo the retaining bolt.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
3. Lift out the foam block.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
The other two blocks can remain in the spare wheel well.
After use The foam block and spare wheel must be replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow on the upper foam block. It should point forward.
NOTE
If the floor hatch is not completely closed, the private locking feature will not function.
Tighten the wheel nuts 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-
tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). 5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel nuts and Install the wheel cover (where applicable). The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's inflation valve must be positioned over the valve.
295
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tire inflation general information Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
Inflation placard
NOTE
· The placards shown indicate inflation
pressure for the tires installed on the vehicle at the factory only.
· A certain amount of air seepage from
the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10degree temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure, which can be found on the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label. Related information
· Tire specifications (p. 298)
· Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare, at least once a month and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire
· Tires storage and age (p. 289) · Tires tread wear indicator (p. 290) · Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300)
G032521
pressure gauge, as automatic service sta-
Tire inflation placard
Tire inflation See the tire inflation table in Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300). A tire inflation pressure placard is also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the
tion gauges may be inaccurate.
· Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance and wear.
· Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns.
side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation
WARNING · Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
pressure.
severe tire cracking, tread separation, or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.
· Under-inflated tires reduce the load
carrying capacity of your vehicle.
296
09 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation checking pressure Inflation pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
3. Replace the valve cap. CAUTION
Related information
09
· Tire specifications (p. 298)
· Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300)
Cold tires The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
· After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
· Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to remove.
· Tires storage and age (p. 289) · Tires tread wear indicator (p. 290)
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. To check inflation pressure: 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air pressure.
4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could puncture the tire and cause an air leak.
5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities.
6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
NOTE · If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
· Some spare tires require higher infla-
tion pressure than the other tires. Consult the tire inflation pressure table, see Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300) or see the inflation pressure placard.
297
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tire specifications
Information on the sidewall
1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
The following information can be found on a tire's sidewall.
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The larger the number, the wider the tire.
Tire ratings
2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width in percent.
Speed ratings The speed ratings in the table translate as follow:
3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is equipped with optional self-supporting
Speed ratings
run flat tires3. 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
inches).
Q
100 mph (160 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers place standardized information on the side-
5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 1521 lbs (690 kg).
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
wall of all tires (see the illustration). The following information is listed on the tire sidewall: The tire designation:
6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure.
Y
186 mph (300 km/h)
NOTE
For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle.
NOTE
The tire's load index and speed rating may not appear on the sidewall because they are not required by law.
3 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models
298
7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS = All Season
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, 1510 means that the tire was manufactured during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall purposes.
9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies indicates or the number of layers of rubbercoated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the BPillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: see Tire specifications Uniform Tire Quality Grading (p. 303) for more information.
12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
09 Wheels and tires
09
299
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tire inflation pressure table The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to
Tire size
215/65 R16 Extra load 235/55 R17 235/50 R18 235/45 R19 Extra load Temporary spare tire T125/80R17
NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer's Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.
the tire inflation placard (see Tire inflation general information (p. 296) for its location) for
information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Some of the tire sizes listed here may not be available for all models in all markets.
Cold tire pressure for up to five persons
Front psi (kPa)
Rear psi (kPa)
36 (250)
36 (250)
39 (270) 61 (420)
39 (270) 61 (420)
300
09 Wheels and tires
Loading specifications Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard:
Curb weight The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Capacity weight All weight added to the curb weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo weight.
Permissible axle weight The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its maximum permissible weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.
NOTE · The location of the various labels in
your vehicle, see Label information (p. 367).
· A table listing important weight limits
for your vehicle, see Weights (p. 372).
Loading specifications load limit
09
The load limit of your vehicle is the combined weight of the occupants and cargo.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
}} 301
09 Wheels and tires
09
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load Tire specifications terminology
· kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-
from your trailer will be transferred to your The following is a glossary of tire-related
sure.
vehicle.
terms.
· PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
WARNING
· Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure.
· Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
· Tire information placard: A placard
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
· Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.
unit of air pressure.
· B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
· Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
· Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
· Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-
eter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
· Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire
or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
tion.
· Inflation pressure: A measure of the
· Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
amount of air in a tire.
the maximum load in pounds and kilo-
· Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric
grams that can be carried by the tire. This rating is established by the tire manufacturer.
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
· Maximum permissible inflation
beyond this pressure will not increase the
pressure: the greatest amount of air
tires load carrying capability.
pressure that should ever be put in the
· Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for
tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
· Recommended tire inflation pressure:
Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres-
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
sure beyond this pressure will not
which is based on the type of tires that
increase the tire's load carrying capabil-
are mounted on a vehicle at the factory.
ity.
This information can be found on the tire
inflation placard(s) located on the driver's
302
09 Wheels and tires
side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table
Tire specifications Uniform Tire
ance. The traction grade assigned to this tire
09
in this chapter.
Quality Grading
is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
· Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same tempera-
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving habits, maintenance practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform-
TEMPERATURE The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of performance that all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
}} 303
09 Wheels and tires
09
WARNING
Snow chains
CAUTION
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure.
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the following restrictions:
· Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved snow chains.
· If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"
· Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.
· Use single-sided snow chains only. · Always follow the chain manufactur-
er's installation instructions carefully. Install chains as tightly as possible and
tires and wheels are installed and are of a
retighten periodically.
size different than the original tires and wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT be used. Sufficient clearances between chains and brakes, suspension and body components must be maintained.
· Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore CANNOT be used.
· All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front wheels.
· Never exceed the chain manufactur-
er's specified maximum speed limit. (Under no circumstances should you exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).
· Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
· The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well as locked wheel braking.
· Certain size tires may not allow the
assembly of snow chains/traction devices.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow chain information.
304
09 Wheels and tires
Snow tires/studded tires4 Owners who live in or regularly commute through areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction.
Tires for winter use:
· It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during cornering, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do so could reduce traction to an unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
· Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire road grip.
· Winter tires wear more quickly on dry
roads in warm weather. They should be removed when the winter driving season has ended.
· Studded tires should be run-in 300
600 miles (500 1000 km) during which the vehicle should be driven as smoothly as possible to give the studs the opportunity to seat properly in the tires. The tires should have the same rotational direction throughout their entire lifetime.
NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter tires before installing such tires.
4 Where permitted
Tire pressure monitoring introduction Volvo provides two different systems to monitor tire pressure: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) or Tire Monitor.
Determining which tire monitoring system is in your vehicle To see which system is installed in your vehicle, press the MY CAR button on the center console. Go to Settings Car settings.
· If your vehicle has a menu called Tire
monitoring, see Tire Monitor - introduction (p. 310).
· If your vehicle has a menu called Tire
pressure, see Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) general information (p. 306).
Introduction Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
09
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale (
) when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that a tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the system's low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The monitoring system's malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
}} 305
09 Wheels and tires
09
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
minated, the system may not be able to
(TPMS) general information
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves
System malfunctions may occur for a variety
to check inflation pressure levels. When the
of reasons, including the installation of
vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors
the vehicle that prevent the tire pressure
transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver
NOTE
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain illuminated. Tire press. syst Service required will be displayed.
monitoring system from functioning properly.
located in the vehicle.
Related information
Always check the system's malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
NOTE
USA FCC ID: KR5S180052050
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
recalibrating (p. 308)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
This device complies with part 15 of the
messages (p. 309)
allow the system to continue to function properly.
NOTE
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
activating/deactivating (p. 308)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
changing wheels (p. 307)
The system indicates low tire pressure but
cause undesired operation.
does not replace normal tire maintenance.
For information on correct tire pressure, please refer to the tire inflation pressure table (see Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300)), the tire inflation pressure placard
When low inflation pressure is detected or if a sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will
light up the tire pressure warning light (
)
located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
(also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument
structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening) or consult your Volvo retailer.
panel and will display one of the following messages: Tire pressure low, Tire needs air now or Tire press. syst Service
required.
WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle.
306
09 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) changing wheels
Please keep the following in mind when changing or replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle:
· Not all aftermarket wheels are equipped
with TPMS sensors in the valves.
· If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo-
rary spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS sensors, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve.
Related information
09
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
general information (p. 306)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
recalibrating (p. 308)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
CAUTION · After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
messages (p. 309)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
activating/deactivating (p. 308)
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
· If wheels without TPMS sensors are
mounted on the vehicle, a text message will displayed in the instrument panel
· Use plastic valve caps only. Metal
caps could corrode and become difficult to remove.
each time the vehicle is driven above
20 mph (30 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
· Once TPMS sensors are properly instal-
led, the warning message should not reappear. If the message is still displayed, drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the message.
· Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors
be fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle, including winter tires. Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of wheels.
NOTE
· If you change to tires with a different
dimension than the factory-installed ones, the TPMS system must be reconfigured for these tires. This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-
sor is moved to another wheel, the sensor's seal, nut, and valve core should be replaced.
· When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.
307
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) recalibrating
20 mph (30 km/h) continuously for at
(TPMS) activating/deactivating
In certain cases, it may be necessary to recalibrate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recommended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-
least 10 minutes. > Calibration is done automatically once
initiated by the driver and the system
Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian models only)
tion pressure table in Tire inflation pressure
does not give any confirmation when
1. Switch off the engine.
table (p. 300)), for example, if higher inflation pressure is necessary when transporting heavy loads, etc.
calibration is finished. The new pressures are used until step 1-5 above are repeated.
2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for additional information).
Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models only)* This is done in the vehicle's menu system.
To recalibrate:
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and put the ignition in mode I or II (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for additional information).
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire pressure.
Related information
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
general information (p. 306)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
messages (p. 309)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
activating/deactivating (p. 308)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
changing wheels (p. 307)
· My Car introduction (p. 76)
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire pressure
4. Select Tire monitoring and press OK/ MENU to turn the system on or off.
Related information
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
general information (p. 306)
4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire pressure and press OK/MENU again.
308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) messages
NOTE · Tire monitoring systems use a tem-
CAUTION
09
· After inflating the tires, always reinstall
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message
has been displayed and the tire pressure
warning light in the instrument panell (
)
has come on:
perature compensated pressure value. This pressure value is dependent on tire temperature and ambient temperature, which can differ from the recommended cold tire pressure in the tire inflation table and on the tire pressure
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
· Use plastic valve caps only. Metal
caps could corrode and become difficult to remove.
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the inflation pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure (consult the tire pressure placard located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening) or the inflation pressure table, see Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300).
placard located on the driver's side Bpillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This means that it may sometimes be necessary to inflate them slightly above the recommended cold pressure value (approx. 3-4 psi or 0.2-0.3 bar) in order to reset a low tire pressure warning.
· To help avoid incorrect tire inflation
WARNING
· Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle.
· Tire monitoring systems cannot indi-
cate sudden tire damage caused by external factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This will erase the warning text and the telltale will go out.
pressure, if possible only inflate the tires when they are cold. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires
Related information
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
general information (p. 306)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
recalibrating (p. 308)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
activating/deactivating (p. 308)
are considered to be hot.
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
changing wheels (p. 307)
· Tire pressure monitoring - introduction
(p. 305)
· Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300)
309
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tire Monitor - introduction
NOTE
Tire Monitor uses the rotational speed of the tires in combination with signal analysis of the ABS sensor signals to determine if they are properly inflated. When a tire is under-inflated, its diameter
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain illuminated. Tire press. syst Service required will be displayed.
(and consequently also its rotational speed) changes. By comparing the individual tires
NOTE
with each other it is possible to determine if one or more tires are under inflated.
The system indicates low tire pressure but does not replace normal tire maintenance.
When low inflation pressure is detected or if the system is not functioning properly, Tire Monitor will light up the tire pressure warning
light (
) (also referred to as a telltale) in
For information on correct tire pressure, please refer to the tire inflation pressure table (see Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300)), the tire inflation pressure placard located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
the instrument panel and will display one of the following messages in the text window, for example: Tire pressure low Check rear
structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening) or consult your Volvo retailer.
right tire5 or Tire press. syst Service
required.
Related information
If two or more tires have low pressure or if the system cannot determine which tire has low
· Tire pressure monitoring - introduction
(p. 305)
pressure, a general text (Tire pressure low
Check tires) will be displayed.
Calibrating Tire Monitor In order for Tire Monitor to work correctly, tire pressure reference values must be set. This must be done each time wheels or tire pressures are changed.
Calibration 1. Switch off the engine.
2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure (consult tire pressure placard located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle) and put the ignition in mode II, see Ignition modes (p. 79).
3. Press the MY CAR button on the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire monitoring.
4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire pressure and press OK/MENU again.
5. Drive away. > The calibration process will be completed while driving and will be interrupted if the vehicle is parked and the engine is switched off. Calibration continues automatically when driving resumes. The system will not give any confirmation when calibration is finished although it will state if calibration fails.
5 That last part of this message varies, depending on the tire(s) effected.
310
09 Wheels and tires
The new reference values will be used until steps 1-5 stated above are repeated.
NOTE
Always remember to calibrate Tire Monitor when the wheels have been changed or the tire pressure has been corrected according to tire pressure placard or tire pressure table. If correct reference values have not been set, the system cannot issue low tire pressure alerts correctly.
Tire Monitor status information
the system is temporarily unavailable. It
09
The current status of the system and the tires
should become operational again shortly.
is indicated by color-coded graphics. This status can be displayed by pressing the
Related information
· Tire Monitor messages (p. 312)
MY CAR button on the center console and
going to Settings Car settings Tire
monitoring.
The following color-coded graphics indicate:
· All green: the system is operational and
all tire pressures are at or above the rec-
ommended levels.
· One yellow wheel: the tire indicated is
under-inflated.
· All wheels yellow: two or more tires are
under-inflated
· All wheels gray: the system is currently
unavailable. It might be necessary to drive at a speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) for several minutes for the system to become operational.
· All wheels gray in combination with the
message Tire press. syst Service required and the telltale in the instru-
ment panel (
) is illuminated: the
system is not functioning correctly. Have
it checked by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
· All wheels gray in combination with the
message Tire press. syst currently
unavailable and the telltale in the
instrument panel (
) is illuminated:
311
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tire Monitor messages When low tire pressure has been detected, a message will be displayed and the tire pressure warning telltale in the instrument panel will illuminate.
Erasing warning messages To erase a low tire pressure message and turn off the telltale:
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the inflation pressure of all four tires (see the article "Tire inflation checking pressure").
2. Re-inflate the tires to the correct pressure (consult the tire pressure placard located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening) or the inflation pressure table, see Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300).
3. Recalibrate Tire Monitor, see Calibrating Tire Monitor (p. 310).
NOTE
To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pressure, only inflate the tires when they are cold. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot.
CAUTION · After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
· Use plastic valve caps only. Metal
caps could corrode and become difficult to remove.
WARNING · Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle.
· Tire monitoring systems cannot indi-
cate sudden tire damage caused by external factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.
Related information
· Tire Monitor messages (p. 312) · Tire inflation checking pressure (p. 297) · Tire inflation pressure table (p. 300)
312
09 Wheels and tires
Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)
WARNING
Tire sealing system* general
09
Self-supporting run flat tires are available as optional equipment on certain models. The vehicle must be equipped with one of the tire pressure monitoring systems if tires of this type are installed. Tires of this type have specially reinforced sidewalls that make it possible to continue driving to a limited extent even though the tire has lost some or all of its inflation pressure. These tires are mounted on special rims (nor-
· SST tires should only be mounted by
service technicians who are familiar with tires of this type.
· SST tires may only be mounted on
vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system.
· Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) if the monitoring system indicates that a tire has lost inflation pressure.
information Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing system* that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in the tread surface and reinflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire's inflation pressure.
mal tires can also be mounted on these rims).
· Do not drive farther than 50 miles
If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yellow TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrument panel and a text message is also displayed. If this happens, reduce speed to not more than 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should
(80 km) before replacing a damaged SST tire.
· Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard
braking or fast turns.
· SST tires must be replaced if they are
be replaced as soon as possible.
damaged. A tire of this type cannot be
repaired.
Related information
· Tire pressure monitoring - introduction
(p. 305)
Introduction The tire sealing system consists of an air compressor, a container for the sealing compound, wiring to connect the system to the vehicle's electrical system via one of the 12volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire's inflation valve.
NOTE
The tire sealing system's compressor has been tested and approved by Volvo.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 313
09 Wheels and tires
||
09
The 12-volt sockets are located in the front
tunnel console, on the rear side of the center
console in the rear seat and in the cargo
area*.
Accessing the tire sealing system The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor of the cargo area. To access it:
1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. 2. Lift out the tire sealing system.
NOTE
· The tire sealing system is only
intended to seal holes on the tire's tread area, not the sidewall.
· Tires with large holes or tears cannot
be repaired with the tire sealing system.
· After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.
WARNING
· After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than approximately 120 miles (200 km).
· Have the tire inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be replaced.
· The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired with the tire sealing system.
· After using the tire sealing system,
drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers and sudden stops.
Tire sealing systemtemporarily repairing a flat tire
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two stages:
· Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is then driven a short distance to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.
314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Wheels and tires
NOTE
Tire sealing system* overview
Bottle with sealing compound
09
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, etc.) from the tire before using the sealing system.
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing system* that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in the tread surface and reinflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire's inflation
Air pressure gauge
· Stage 2: The tire's inflation pressure is
pressure.
checked and adjusted if necessary.
WARNING
· Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
· Keep the tire sealing system away
from children.
· Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
· Apply the parking brake.
Related information
· Tire sealing system* overview (p. 315) · Tire sealing system* inflating tires
(p. 319)
· Tire sealing system* sealing compound
container (p. 320)
· Tire sealing system* sealing hole
(p. 316)
· Tire sealing system checking inflation
pressure (p. 318)
· Tunnel console 12-volt sockets (p. 140) · 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)
Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the compressor) On/Off switch Electrical wire Bottle holder (orange cover) Protective hose cover Air release knob Hose
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 315
09 Wheels and tires
||
09
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind when using the tire sealing system:
· The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed.
· The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes. Precautions:
· Keep out of reach of children. · Do not ingest the contents. · Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
· Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
· Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
· Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
· Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention.
· Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention.
· Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container to a hazardous or special waste collection point.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder.
Related information
· Tire sealing system* general information
(p. 313)
· Tire sealing system* inflating tires
(p. 319)
· Tire sealing system checking inflation
pressure (p. 318)
· Tire sealing system* sealing hole
(p. 316)
· Tire sealing system* sealing compound
container (p. 320)
Tire sealing system* sealing hole The tire sealing system can be used to temporarily seal a hole in the tread surface of a tire. Stage 1: Sealing the hole 1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be clearly visible to the driver. 2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be pressed down).
WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash the affected area immediately with soap and water.
3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle of sealing compound.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder.
4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Wheels and tires
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
09
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it securely in place and help prevent sealing compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire's inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system's hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.
6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12-volt socket in the vehicle.
The vehicle´s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used to avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system. 8. Start the tire sealing system's compres-
sor by pressing the on/off switch to position I.
· Never stand next to the tire being infla-
ted when the compressor is in operation.
· If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
· If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The vehicle should not be driven if this occurs. Contact a towing service or Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if applicable.
NOTE
NOTE
Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sockets is being used while the compressor is in operation.
7. Start the vehicle's engine.
The air pressure gauge will temporarily show an increase in pressure to approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is being pumped into the tire. The pressure should return to a normal level after approximately 30 seconds. 9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22--44 psi (1.8--3.0 bar). Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge.
}} 317
09 Wheels and tires
09
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, turn off the compressor. In this case, the hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle should not be driven.
10. Switch off the compressor and disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
11. Unscrew the hose from the tire's inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap.
CAUTION · After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
· Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to remove.
12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the use of the sealing compound may lead to incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. Use the tire sealing system to check and adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.
NOTE · Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used again to check the tire's inflation pressure.
· The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle holder. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the bottle removed and properly disposed of.
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior, or noises should occur while driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other visible damage, and recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Tire sealing system checking inflation pressure The tire sealing system can also be used to check the tires' inflation pressure. Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure 1. Connect the tire sealing system as
described in stage 1, see Tire sealing system* sealing hole (p. 316). 2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system's compressor. If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.
318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Wheels and tires
Tire sealing system* inflating tires
WARNING
CAUTION
09
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate the tires.
To do so: 1. Park the car in a safe place. 2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be pressed down).
· The vehicle's engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system. The parking brake should be securely applied and the gear selector should be in the P (park) position.
· Children should never be left unatten-
ded in the vehicle when the engine is
The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire's inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap.
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire's
inflation valve and screw the hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand. 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12-volt socket in the vehicle. 6. Start the vehicle's engine.
running.
7. Check the tire's inflation pressure on the gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the
CAUTION
· After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
· Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to remove.
tire sealing system's compressor (press
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
the on/off switch to position I). If neces-
12-volt socket.
sary, release air from the tire by turning
the air release knob counterclockwise.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319
09 Wheels and tires
09 Tire sealing system* sealing compound container The sealing compound container must be replaced if the tire sealing system has been used to repair a tire or if the container's expiration date has passed (see the date on decal). Replacing the sealing compound container NOTE · After use, the sealing compound bot-
tle, the hose, and certain other system components must be replaced. Please consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts.
· If the sealing compound bottle's expi-
ration date has passed, please take it to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station that can properly dispose of harmful substances.
320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
10 Maintenance and servicing
Maintenance introduction
performed anytime a malfunction is observed
Periodic maintenance helps minimize
Periodic maintenance will help keep your
or suspected.
emissions
vehicle running well.
Applicable warranties U.S./Canada
10
Introduction
The maintenance services contain several
checks that require special instruments and
tools and therefore must be performed by a
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties is provided.
· New Vehicle Limited Warranty
qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in
· Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
top condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.
· Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty · Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint
The Federal Clean Air Act U.S.
Systems Limited Warranty
NOTE · Refer to your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for a comprehensive service and maintenance schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000 km). This program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your vehicle and includes components that affect vehi-
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manufacturers to furnish written instructions to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper servicing and function of the components that control emissions. These services, which are listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
· Emission Design and Defect Warranty · Emission Performance Warranty
These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/ provincial law. Refer to your separate War-
cle emissions.
· The Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet also contains detailed information concerning the warranties that apply to your vehicle.
Information" booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will be required to pay for labor and material used.
ranty and Service Records Information booklet for detailed information concerning each of the warranties.
Related information
· Climate general information (p. 124)
Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be
322
10 Maintenance and servicing
Maintenance owner maintenance
of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by
Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-
salt residues.
vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents
and Service Records Information booklet. The following points can be carried out
at the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect.
10
between the normally scheduled maintenance services.
NOTE
Owner maintenance
Each time the car is refueled:
· Check the engine oil level. · Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.
Monthly:
· Check cold tire pressure in all tires.
Inspect the tires for wear.
· Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and "max" markings.
· Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
· Wipe driver information displays with a
soft cloth.
· Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information.
Complete service information for qualified technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
Related information
· Maintenance opening/closing hood
(p. 327)
· Engine compartment overview (p. 328) · Engine compartment coolant (p. 331) · Engine compartment engine oil (p. 329) · Engine compartment power steering
fluid (p. 333)
· Engine compartment washer fluid
(p. 344)
· Cleaning the interior (p. 362) · Washing the car (p. 360) · Tire inflation checking pressure (p. 297) · Tires tread wear indicator (p. 290)
As needed: Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup
323
10 Maintenance and servicing
Maintenance hoisting When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage lift must be positioned in the correct lifting points.
10 Hoisting the vehicle
If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, it should be placed: Front: under either of the two reinforced areas under the front section of the vehicle, not under to jack attachment points (the outermost points shown in the illustration). Rear: Under the jack attachment points. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands or similar structures.
Related information
· Changing a wheel removing wheel
(p. 291)
324
10 Maintenance and servicing
Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission controls. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a component or system that is not performing within an expected range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will store a message about any fault.
Emission inspection readiness
How do states use OBD II for emission inspections? Many states connect a computer directly to a vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then read "faults." In some states, this type of inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission inspection? Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons.
· If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
· If your vehicle's Check Engine light was
lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area.
· If you had recent service that required
disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection.
How can I prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection?
· If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or
was lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
· If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that required disconnecting the battery, a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-andgo/highway driving are typically needed to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip.
· Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
Booking service and repairs Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes setting up a time for service, maintenance and/or repairs directly from the vehicle quick and convenient.
Prerequisites
· The owner (primary driver) must have a
valid Volvo ID. See Volvo ID (p. 21) for additional information.
· The vehicle must be connected to the
Internet using a paired Bluetooth® cell phone. See your Sensus Infotainment supplement for information on pairing a cell phone. On models equipped with Volvo On Call (VOC)*, you can connect to the Internet using your separate VOC data plan. Refer to your separate Volvo On Call manual.
· By default, the retailer where you pur-
chased your vehicle will be your preferred (primary) retailer/Volvo authorized workshop who will perform service and repairs on your vehicle. To change the preferred retailer, go to Dealer Locator at volvocars.com and select a retailer, click on Service Scheduler and book an appointment at the new preferred retailer.
· In order to be guided through the on-
screen steps, the menu alternative Display notifications must be activated.
CSB menu access Once the prerequisites have been established, all CSB-related menus can be
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10
}} 325
10 Maintenance and servicing
||
accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU and then selecting Maintenance & repair.
On-screen service messages
vehicle's instrument panel will also be turned off remotely by Volvo.
Booking information and data from the
10
vehicle
If you request an appointment from your vehi-
cle, with your consent, booking information
and data about your vehicle1 will be transmit-
ted to your preferred retailer.
· No: No other messages will be displayed
on the Sensus screen but the Service Reminder Light on the vehicle's instrument panel will stay on. If you have answered "No", service can still be booked manually (see the following section).
Using the service Once the prerequisites have been established, all CSB-related menus can be accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU and then selecting Maintenance & repair.
If the time for the next regularly scheduled service is approaching, if the vehicle requires certain types of repairs or if a system needs to be checked, a message will be displayed. You will then by guided through the steps required to book service or repairs.
On-screen service message The pop-up service alert menu offers the following alternatives:
· Yes: The vehicle will transmit a booking
request as well as vehicle data directly to your preferred retailer. In return, you will receive an email from this retailer with a link to their booking portal. From a smartphone or a computer, you can select a day and time that suits you and specify any other service requests that you may have. When you have submitted your request, it will be entered into the retailer's booking portal and you will receive immediate confirmation online and via email. The service reminder light in the
· Postpone: The pop-up menu will be dis-
played that next time the engine is started. Booking service or repairs manually Access your Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler portal from a smartphone or a computer to select a day and time that suits you and specify any other service requests that you may have. When you have submitted your request, it will be entered into the retailer's booking portal and you will receive immediate confirmation online and via email.
My Appointments This displays booking information. Select Maintenance & repair My
Appointments.
Transmitting vehicle data In order for a retailer to access vehicle data,
the information is initially sent to a central
Volvo database (not directly to your retailer)
1 This information includes: service requirements, status of various functions, odometer reading and the vehicle's VIN number and software version.
326
10 Maintenance and servicing
where any retailer can access or search for
Maintenance opening/closing hood
WARNING
this information using your vehicle's VIN number. This number can be found in your warranty booklet or on the dashboard at the
The hood is opened by first releasing the lock from the passenger compartment and then pressing the release control.
Check that the hood locks properly when closed.
lower left corner of the windshield.
10
Select Maintenance & repair Send vehicle data.
Opening and closing the hood
Related information
· Maintenance owner maintenance
(p. 323)
Booking information and vehicle data When you opt to book service from your vehicle, booking information and vehicle data will be transmitted. Vehicle data consists of a number of parameters in the following areas:
· Engine compartment overview (p. 328)
· Service requirements
· Function status · Fluid levels
· Odometer reading (mileage) · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
· The vehicle's software version
Related information
· Volvo ID (p. 21)
G010951
Pull the lever located under the left side of the dash to release the hood lock. Lift the hood slightly. Press the release control (located under the right front edge of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.
327
10 Maintenance and servicing
Engine compartment overview The overview shows the main inspection points in the engine compartment.
10
Coolant expansion tank Power steering fluid reservoir Dipstick-engine oil Filler cap-engine oil Cover over brake fluid reservoir Battery Relay/fuse box Washer fluid reservoir
Engine compartment - 4-cylinder engines only Filler cap-engine oil Coolant expansion tank Power steering fluid reservoir Radiator Brake fluid reservoir Battery Relay/fuse box Washer fluid reservoir Air cleaner
The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine model.
WARNING
The cooling fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.
WARNING
Before performing any operations in the engine compartment, the ignition should always be completely switched off (in mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 79)) and there should be no remote keys in the passenger compartment. The gear selector should be in the P (park) position. If the engine has been running, wait until it has cooled before touching any components in the engine compartment. The distributor ignition system operates at very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when:
· Replacing distributor ignition compo-
nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.
· Do not touch any part of the distributor
ignition system while the engine is running. This may result in unintended movements and body injury.
328
Related information
· Maintenance opening/closing hood
(p. 327)
· Maintenance owner maintenance
(p. 323)
10 Maintenance and servicing
Engine compartment engine oil
CAUTION
The correct oil must be used for the stated oil change (service) intervals to apply.
· Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the
The oil level on 4-cylinder engines is checked electronically and is checked using a dipstick
oil level becomes too low.
· Oil that is lower than the specified
10
on 5- and 6-cylinder engines.
quality can damage the engine.
Checking the engine oil (5- and 6cylinder engines)
The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service.
· Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.
· Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.
· Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
· See Oil specifications (p. 374) for oil
specifications.
· Also, refer to the Warranty and Service
Records information booklet for information on oil change intervals and oil specifications.
could cause an increase in oil consumption.
· Oil changes should be carried out by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
}} 329
10 Maintenance and servicing
|| Checking and adding oil
10
Electronic oil level sensor (4-cylinder engines only)
G021734 G021737
Location of the filler cap and dipstick
NOTE
Before checking the oil:
· The car should be parked on a level
surface.
· If the engine is warm, wait for at least
10 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off.
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick Checking the oil 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a
lint-free rag. 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and
check the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.
WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.
Oil filler cap No action is necessary until a message is displayed, see the following illustration.
330
10 Maintenance and servicing
Left: digital instrument panel*, Right: analog instrument panel
Message
Oil level The oil level can be checked when the engine is not running by scrolling to the oil level sensor using the thumb wheel on the left steering wheel lever.
CAUTION · If Oil service required is displayed,
the oil level may be too high. Take the vehicle to an authorized Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
· If the oil level sensor indicates that the
level is too low, using the correct oil, top up with the amount of oil indicated as soon as possible, see oil specifications (p. 374).
WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.
Electronically checking the oil level The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service.
Engine compartment coolant
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, con-
sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
10
Level check and filling
To check the oil level:
1. Activate ignition mode II, see Ignition modes (p. 79).
2. Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering wheel lever until Oil level is displayed. > The oil level will be displayed.
NOTE
· The system cannot detect changes in
the oil level immediately. The vehicle must be driven approximately 20 miles (30 km) or have been parked on level ground with the engine off for 5 minutes before the oil level reading will be correct.
· If the necessary conditions are not met
for checking the oil level electronically (time interval after the engine was switched off, if the vehicle is parked on an incline, etc.), No values available will be displayed. This does not indicate a problem with the oil level sensor.
Location of the coolant reservoir See Fuel tank volume specification and volume (p. 377) for information on cooling system capacities.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 331
10 Maintenance and servicing
CAUTION
· If necessary, top up the cooling sys-
tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti-
10
freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze).
· Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
· If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/anti-
freeze.
· The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!
· Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and anti-
freeze qualities of the coolant and has
a lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.
· Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicle's cooling system.
WARNING
· Never remove the expansion tank cap
while the engine is warm. Wait until the engine cools.
· If it is necessary to top off the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly so that the overpressure dissipates.
Engine compartment brake fluid The brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the reservoir.
Location of the brake fluid reservoir
332
10 Maintenance and servicing
Checking the level The fluid reservoir is concealed under the round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed. Check, without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C). Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. When driving under extremely hard conditions (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING · If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.
· Dot 4 should never be mixed with any
other type of brake fluid.
Filling 1. Turn and open the cover.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Engine compartment power steering fluid
The fluid level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. For capacities and recom-
mended fluid grade, see Fuel tank volume
10
specification and volume (p. 377).
Check the level frequently. It does not normally require changing.
WARNING
If a problem should occur in the power steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
}} 333
10 Maintenance and servicing
CAUTION
Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking. 10
Bulbs introduction Certain bulbs can be replaced by the vehicle's owner. However, the bulbs on the following list should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
All bulb specifications are listed in Bulbs specifications (p. 341).
· Active Bending Lights · Front parking lights · Daytime running lights · Turn signals in the door mirrors · Approach lighting in the door mirrors · Interior lighting · Brake lights · Rear parking lights · Rear side marker lights · Back-up lights · Rear fog light · LED bulbs
NOTE
· For information regarding any bulbs
not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and authorized Volvo service technician.
· Always switch off the ignition before
starting to replace a bulb.
· If an error message remains in the dis-
play after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
· Condensation may form temporarily on
the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time.
· The optional Active Bending Light
bulbs contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
334
10 Maintenance and servicing
CAUTION
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which will damage it.
WARNING · The engine should not be running
when changing bulbs.
· If the engine has been running just
prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components in the engine compartment will be hot.
WARNING · Active Bending Lights* due to the
high voltage used by these headlights, these bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Turn off the lights and remove the
remote key from the ignition before changing any bulbs.
Related information
· Bulbs headlight housing (p. 335) · Bulbs vanity mirror lighting (p. 341) · Bulbs cargo area lighting (p. 340) · Bulbs license plate lighting (p. 340)
Bulbs headlight housing The entire headlight housing must be lifted out when replacing all front bulbs. Removing the headlight housing
Pull out the headlight housing's locking pins. Pull the headlight housing straight out.
CAUTION
When disconnecting the connector, pull on the connector itself and not on the wiring.
G010325
Unplug the wiring connector by holding down the clip with your thumb.
Pull the connector out with the other
hand.
5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it
10
on a soft surface to avoid scratching the
lens.
6. Replace the defective bulb(s).
Reinserting the headlight housing 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into
place.
2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking pins. Check that they are correctly inserted.
The headlight housing must be properly in place and the wiring connector correctly reconnected before the lighting is switched on or the remote key is inserted into the ignition slot.
3. Check that the lights function properly.
Related information
· Bulbs introduction (p. 334) · Bulbs cover (p. 336) · Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335
10 Maintenance and servicing
Bulbs cover The larger cover has to be removed in order to change the high/low beam headlight bulbs.
· Bulbs extra high beam (p. 337)
10
Removing the cover to access the bulbs
Bulbs low beam, Halogen The low beam bulb is concealed by the larger cover.
G021745 G021746
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Bulbs introduction (p. 334).
1. Open the retaining clamp by pressing it upward/outward.
2. Press down the clips on the cover and remove it.
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order. Related information
· Bulbs headlight housing (p. 335) · Bulbs low beam, Halogen (p. 336) · Bulbs high beam, Halogen (p. 337)
336
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs headlight housing (p. 335)).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs cover (p. 336)).
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder
downward. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it
snaps into place. It can only be secured in one position. 6. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
10 Maintenance and servicing
Bulbs high beam, Halogen The high beam bulb is concealed behind the larger cover.
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
Bulbs extra high beam The extra high beam bulb is concealed by the larger cover.
10
G021747
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs headlight housing (p. 335)).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs cover (p. 336)).
3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out.
4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and
turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be secured in one position. 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing. 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
}}
337
10 Maintenance and servicing
|| Extra high beam2
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
10
Bulbs front turn signals The turn signal bulb is concealed behind the smaller cover.
G021748 G021750
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs headlight housing (p. 335)).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs cover (p. 336)).
3. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder downward.
4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. Insert a new bulb in the connector until it
snaps in place. It can only be inserted in one way. 6. Return the bulb holder into position in the headlight housing. 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.
338
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs headlight housing (p. 335)).
2. Remove the round cover by pulling the tab until the cover comes off.
3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb. 4. Pull out the burned out bulb and press a
new bulb into the socket. It can only be secured in one position. 5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and press until it clicks into place. 6. Press the cover in place until it clicks into position.
7. Reinstall the headlight housing. Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
10 Maintenance and servicing
Bulbs front side marker lights The side marker bulb is concealed behind the smaller cover.
Bulbs location of taillight bulbs The following illustrations show the location of the bulbs in the taillight cluster.
10
G021751
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs headlight housing (p. 335)).
2. Remove the small round cover over the bulbs.
3. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder. 4. Pull out the burned out bulb and press a
new bulb into the socket. It can only be secured in one position. 5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and press until it clicks into place. 6. Press the cover in place until it clicks into position.
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
Taillight lens, right side Parking light (LEDs) Brake light (LEDs) Turn signal Side maker light (LEDs) Backup light Rear fog light Brake light (LEDs)
Related information
· Bulbs introduction (p. 334) · Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
339
10 Maintenance and servicing
Bulbs brake lights and taillights The turn signal bulb in the taillight cluster is replaced from inside the cargo area.
10
Taillight housing, turn signal
Bulbs license plate lighting The license plate lighting is located next to the tailgate handle.
Bulbs cargo area lighting The cargo area light is located in the ceiling liner.
G017456 G017458 G031942
1. Open the panel. 2. Remove the insulation by pulling it
straight out. 3. Remove the entire bulb unit by turning its
handle counterclockwise. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. Replace the bulb in the reverse order.
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341) · Bulbs location of taillight bulbs (p. 339)
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing
and pull it out. 3. Replace the bulb. 4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and
tighten the screws.
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the bulb housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
it back into the bulb housing.
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
340
10 Maintenance and servicing
Bulbs vanity mirror lighting
Bulbs specifications
Lighting func- Wat- Bulb
The vanity mirror bulbs are located behind the lens.
The following bulbs can be replaced by the vehicles owner. All other bulbs should only be
tion
tage
Removing the lens
replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo
Glove compart- 5
SV8.5
service technician.
ment lighting
(length
10
43mm)
Lighting func- Wat-
tion
tage
Bulb
Cargo area light- 10 ing
SV8.5 (length
Extra high beam 55
H7 LL
43mm)
(models with
Active Bending Lights*)
NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer's Parts
Low beam (halo- 55 gen)
H11 LL
department for the most up-to-date bulb specifications.
1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the lens and carefully exert upward pressure to release the retaining lugs.
2. Snap out the lens. 3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do not exert too much pressure on the bulb with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.
Reinstalling the lens 1. Put the lens back into position. 2. Press it into place.
High beam (hal- 65 ogen)
Rear turn signals 21
Front turn sig-
21
nals
License plate
5
lighting
Vanity mirror
2
Front side
5
marker lights
H9
PY21W SV H21W LL
C5W LL
W2x4.6d type T5 W5W LL
Related information
· Bulbs introduction (p. 334)
Related information
· Bulbs specifications (p. 341)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 341
10 Maintenance and servicing
Wiper blades service position
The windshield wiper blades must be in the
vertical (service) position for replacement,
washing or to lift them away from the wind-
10
shield when e.g., removing ice or snow.
Wiper blades in service position
CAUTION
Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in position before attempting to move them to the service position.
To put the windshiield wipers in the service position: 1. Insert the remote key into the ignition
slot3 and press the START/STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for detailed information about the ignition modes). 2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button again briefly to switch the ignition off. 3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. > The wipers will then move to the verti-
cal (service) position on the windshield. The wipers can be returned to the normal position by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or by starting the engine).
CAUTION
If the wiper arms have been folded out from the windshield while in the service position, fold them back against the windshield before returning the wipers to the normal position to help avoid scratching the paint on the hood.
Related information
· Engine compartment washer fluid
(p. 344)
3 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
342
Wiper blades windshield The wiper blades should be replaced regularly for best effect. The windshield wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing or to lift them away from the windshield when e.g., removing ice or snow. Replacing the windshield wiper blades
NOTE
The windshield wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the one on the passenger side.
G021763
10 Maintenance and servicing
With the wipers in the service position,
fold out the wiper arm from the wind-
shield. Press the button on the wiper
blade attachment and pull the wiper
blade straight out, parallel with the wiper
10
arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place.
Check that the blade is securely in place.
4. Press the wipers back against the windshield.
To return the wipers from the service position to the normal position, fold the wipers back against the windshield and press the START/ STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or start the engine).
Cleaning Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent.
Related information
· Engine compartment washer fluid
(p. 344)
· Wiper blades service position (p. 342)
343
10 Maintenance and servicing
Wiper blades tailgate
Engine compartment washer fluid
· 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)
The wiper blades should be replaced regularly Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and
for best effect.
headlights clean. During cold weather, the
10
Replacing the tailgate wiper blade
reservoir should be filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. Use
· 4.7 US qts (4.5 liters4)
Related information
· Wiper blades service position (p. 342)
Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the equivalent
with a recommended pH value between 6 and
8.
G032770 G021764
1. Fold the wiper arm outward. 2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at
the arrow). 3. Pull out the blade to release it from the
wiper arm. 4. Press the new wiper blade into place and
check that it seats securely. 5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tail-
gate window.
Related information
· Engine compartment washer fluid
(p. 344)
Location of the washer fluid reservoir
The windshield and headlight washers share a common reservoir. The washer fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment. For capacities, see the printed Owner's Manual. Specification:Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water. Volume:
4 Models without headlight washers
344
10 Maintenance and servicing
Battery symbols There are information and warning symbols on the battery.
Symbols on the battery Wear protective goggles.
Contains corrosive acid. Risk of explosion
Keep away from children.
Recycle properly
Avoid smoking, open flames, and/or sparks. See the owner's manual.
NOTE
A used battery should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. Consult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a recycling station.
Related information
· Battery changing (p. 347) · Battery handling (p. 345) · Battery maintenance (p. 346)
Battery handling
The battery's service life is affected by the
number of starts, if it has been discharged,
driving style, driving conditions, weather con-
ditions ,etc.
10
Handling
· Check that the battery cables are cor-
rectly connected and tightened.
· Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery).
· If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
· The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery's starting capacity.
· Because the battery's starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances.
· Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery. Only traditional types of battery chargers should be used.
}} 345
10 Maintenance and servicing
|| CAUTION
The infotainment system's energy-saving
feature may not function correctly or at all,
10
and/or a message may be displayed if a battery charger or jumper cables are not
connected properly.
· The negative terminal on the battery
must never be used to connect a jumper cable or a battery charger. Only the ground point on the chassis may be used.
See Jump starting (p. 250) for an illustration and additional information.
Related information
· Battery changing (p. 347) · Battery maintenance (p. 346) · Battery symbols (p. 345)
WARNING
· Never expose the battery to open
flame or electric spark.
· Do not smoke near the battery. · Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
346
Battery maintenance Proper battery maintenance can help prolong its service life.
Maintenance
· Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.
· If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.
· The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.
· After inspection, be sure the cap over
each battery cell or the cover is securely in place.
· Check that the battery cables are cor-
rectly connected and properly tightened.
· Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, or when the key is in the ignition. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system.
· The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery.
· To help keep the battery in good condi-
tion, the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 minutes a week or connected to a charger with an automatic charging function.
· If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps prolong its service life.
10 Maintenance and servicing
· The service life of a battery is affected by
Battery changing
factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery's starting capacity.
When changing batteries, be sure to use the correct battery for your vehicle. Consult a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo
· Because the battery's starting capacity
service technician.
10
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven
Changing
for an extended period of time or if the
vehicle is usually only driven short dis-
tances.
CAUTION
· Always use distilled or deionized water
(battery water).
· Never fill above the level mark in the
cell.
Related information
· Battery changing (p. 347) · Battery handling (p. 345) · Battery symbols (p. 345)
WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.
}} 347
10 Maintenance and servicing
||
Removal
Installation
Fuses introduction
Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key 1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
from the ignition slot and wait at least
5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so
10
that all information in the vehicle's electrical
system can be stored in the control modules.
Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover.
Release the rubber molding so that the rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical components from overloading.
There are relay/fuseboxes located in the engine compartment, the passenger compartment and the cargo area. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is diffi-
Detach the black negative cable. Detach the red positive cable
until it reaches the rear edge of the box. 3. Tighten the clamp that secures the bat-
tery.
cult to remove, a special fuse removal tool is located on the inside of the engine compartment fusebox cover.
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery
Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp. Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
WARNING
4. Connect the ventilation hose. > Be sure that it is correctly connected to the battery and the vent in the vehicle's body.
5. Connect the red positive cable. 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
2. From the side, examine the curved metal wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.
If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal). 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal). Related information
· Battery handling (p. 345) · Battery symbols (p. 345)
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.
348
Location of the fuseboxes
Engine compartment Under the glove compartment Under the glove compartment Cargo area Engine compartment cold zone (Start/ Stop only)
10 Maintenance and servicing
10
349
10 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses engine compartment The fuses in the engine compartment protect e.g., engine and brake functions.
10
350
10 Maintenance and servicing
Engine compartment, upper Engine compartment, front Engine compartment, lower
Positions These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in C are located under A.
A decal on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses.
· Fuses 1 15, 34 and 42 44 are relays/
circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Fuses 16 33 and 35 41 may be
changed at any time when necessary. There is a special fuse removal tool on the underside of the cover.
Pos Function
A
Circuit breaker: central 50 electrical module under the glove compartmentA
Circuit breaker: central 50 electrical module under the glove compartment
Pos Function
A
Circuit breaker: central 60 electrical module in the cargo compartmentA
Circuit breaker: central 60 electrical module under the glove compartmentA
Circuit breaker: central 60 electrical module under the glove compartmentA
Headed windshield*,
40
driver's side
Windshield wipers
30
Climate system
40
blowerA
Headed windshield*,
40
passenger's side
ABS pump
40
Pos Function
A
ABS valves
20
Headlight washers
20
10
Active Bending Lights- 10 headlight leveling*
Central electrical mod- 20 ule (under the glove compartment)
ABS
5
Adjustable steering
5
force*
Engine Control Module 10 (ECM), transmission, SRS
Heated washer noz-
10
zles*
-
Lighting panel
5
-
-
-
Relay coils
5
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 351
10 Maintenance and servicing
||
Pos Function
A
Auxiliary lights*
20
10
Horn
15
Relay coils, Engine
10
Control Module (ECM)
Control module - auto- 15 matic transmission
A/C compressor (not 15 4-cyl. engines)
Relay-coils A/C, relay 5 coils in engine compartment cold zone for Start/Stop
Starter motor relayA
30
Engine control module 20 (4-cyl. engines) Ignition coils (5-/6-cyl. engines), condenser (6-cyl. engines) Engine Control Module 20 (4-cyl. engines) Engine Control Module 10 (5-cyl. & 6-cyl. engines)
Pos Function
A
4-cyl. engines: mass
10
air meter, thermostat,
EVAP valve
5-/6-cyl. engines:
15
Injection system, mass
air meter (6-cyl.
engines only), engine
control module
A/C compressor (5-/6- 10 cyl. engines), engine valves, engine control module (6-cyl. engines), solenoids (6cyl. non-turbo only), mass air meter (6-cyl. only), oil level sensor (5-cyl. only)
Engine valves/oil
15
pump/center heated
oxygen sensor (4-cyl.
engines)
Front/rear heated oxy- 15 gen sensors (4-cyl. engines), EVAP valve (5-/6-cyl. engines), heated oxygen sensors (5-/6-cyl. engines)
352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Pos Function
A
Oil pump/crankcase
10
ventilation heater/cool-
ant pump (5-cyl.
engines)
Ignition coils (4-cyl.
15
engines)
Fuel leakage detection 5 (5-/6-cyl. engines), control module for radiator shutter (5-cyl. engines)
Fuel leakage detection, 7.5 A/C solenoid (4-cyl. engines)
Coolant pump (4-cyl. 50 engines)
Cooling fan
60 (4/5cyl. engines)
80 (6-cyl. engines)
Power steering
100
A This position is not used on vehicles with the optional Start/Stop function, refer to the table "Engine compartment cold zone" in Fuses engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only) (p. 358).
Related information
· Fuses glove compartment (p. 354) · Fuses cargo area/trunk (p. 357)
10 Maintenance and servicing
10
353
10 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses glove compartment The fuses under the glove compartment protect components such as the infotainment system and optional power seat.
10
Fusebox A: General fuses Fusebox B: Control module fuses Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuseboxes. 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. 2. The fuses are accessible.
Positions: fusebox A
Pos Function
A
Circuit breaker for the infotain- 40 ment system and for fuses 16-20 -
-
Heated steering wheel*
10
-
Pos Function
A
-
12-volt socket (cargo area)
15
Controls in driver's door
20
Controls in front passenger's 20 door Controls in right rear passeng- 20 er's door
354 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Maintenance and servicing
Pos Function
A
Controls in left rear passeng- 20 er's door
Keyless drive*
20
Power driver's seat*
20
Power front passenger's seat* 20
-
Infotainment system display
5
Infotainment system: amplifier, 10 SiriusXMTM satellite radio*
Sensus control module
15
Bluetooth hands-free system 5
-
Power moonroof*
5
Courtesy lighting, climate system sensor
12-volt sockets in tunnel con- 15 sole
Heated rear seat* (passenger's 15 side)
Heated rear seat* (driver's
15
side)
Pos Function
A
-
Heated front passenger's
15
seat*
Heated driver's seat*
15
Park assist*
5
All Wheel Drive* control mod- 15 ule
Active chassis system*
10
Positions: fusebox B
Pos Function
A
Tailgate wiper
15
-
Front courtesy lighting, driv- 7.5 er's door power window controls, power seat(s)*,
Instrument panel
5
Adaptive cruise control/colli- 10 sion warning*
Courtesy lighting, rain sen-
7.5
sor*, HomeLInk® Wireless
Control System*
Pos Function
A
Steering wheel module
7.5
Cental locking: fuel filler door 10
10
Tailgate window washer
15
Windshield washers
15
Tailgate unlock
10
Electrical folding rear seat
10
outboard head restraints*
Fuel pump
20
Climate system control panel 5
-
Alarm, On-board diagnostic
5
system
Satellite radio *, audio system 10 amplifier
Airbag system, occupant
10
weight sensor
Collision warning system*
5
Accelerator pedal sensor,
7.5
auto-dim mirror function,
heated rear seats*
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}} 355
10 Maintenance and servicing
||
Pos Function
A
-
10
Brake lights
5
Power moonroof*
20
Immobilizer
5
Related information
· Fuses engine compartment (p. 350) · Fuses cargo area/trunk (p. 357) · Fuses engine compartment cold zone
(Start/Stop only) (p. 358)
356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses cargo area/trunk The fuses in the cargo area/trunk protect components such as trailer connections, the parking brake, etc.
10 Maintenance and servicing
10
Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area
Positions
Pos Function
Pos Function
A
Power tailgate*
Electric parking brake (left
30
side)
-
Electric parking brake (right
30
-
side)
-
Heated rear window
30
Trailer socket 2*
15
-
A
Pos Function
A
20
Trailer socket 1*
40
-
Related information
· Fuses engine compartment (p. 350) · Fuses glove compartment (p. 354) · Fuses engine compartment cold zone
(Start/Stop only) (p. 358)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357
10 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only)7
There are fuses in the engine compartment
cold zone on models with the Start/Stop
10
function.
Location of Start/Stop fuses Positions
· Fuses A1, A2 and 111 are relays/circuit
breakers and should only be removed or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Fuse 12 may be changed at any time
when necessary.
7 Option on 4-cyl. engines
358
Pos Function
A
Circuit breaker: central elec- 175 trical module in the engine compartment
Circuit breaker: fuseboxes
175
under the glove compart-
ment, central electrical mod-
ule in the cargo area
Pos Function
A
-
Circuit breaker: fusebox B
50
under the glove compartment
(see Fuses glove compart-
ment (p. 354))
10 Maintenance and servicing
Pos Function
A
Related information
· Fuses engine compartment (p. 350)
Circuit breaker: fusebox A
60
· Fuses glove compartment (p. 354)
under the glove compartment (see Fuses glove compartment (p. 354))
· Fuses cargo area/trunk (p. 357) · Start/Stop introduction (p. 256)
10
Circuit breaker: fusebox A
60
under the glove compartment
(see Fuses glove compart-
ment (p. 354))
Circuit breaker: central elec- 60 trical module in the cargo area
Climate system blower
40
Starter motor relay
30
Internal diode
50
Auxiliary battery
70
Central electrical module:
15
auxiliary battery reference
voltage, auxiliary battery
charging point
359
10 Maintenance and servicing
Washing the car
· Wash off the dirt from the underside
The vehicle should be washed at regular inter-
(wheel housings, fenders, etc).
vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
· In areas of high industrial fallout, more
adhere to the paint and may cause damage.
frequent washing is recommended.
10
To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly
important to wash the car frequently in the
NOTE
wintertime.
When washing the car, remember to
The following points should be kept in mind when washing and cleaning the car:
remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills.
· Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid scratching, use lukewarm water to soften the dirt before you wash with a soft sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.
· Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may be permanently damaged.
· A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.
· Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the doors and rocker panels.
· Tar spots can be removed with tar
remover after the car has been washed.
· A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility considerably and also helps prolong the service life of the wiper blades.
CAUTION · During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray into the locks.
· Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably. Clean the headlights regularly, for example when refueling. Special moonroof cautions:
· Always close the moonroof and sun
shade before washing your vehicle.
· Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the moonroof.
· Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the moonroof.
Exterior components Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning products, available at your Volvo retailer,
for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental components such as chromed strips on the exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for using these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers should not be used.
CAUTION · Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or
rubber components
· Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
· Polishes containing abrasive sub-
stances should not be used
Related information
· Polishing and waxing (p. 361) · Cleaning the interior (p. 362)
360
10 Maintenance and servicing
Automatic car wash The vehicle should be washed at regular intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently in the wintertime. · We do NOT recommend washing your
car in an automatic wash during the first few months (because the paint will not have hardened sufficiently).
· An automatic wash is a simple and quick
way to clean your car, but it is worth remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the car with sponge and water. Keeping the underbody clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic washers do not have facilities for washing the underbody.
NOTE
Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time.
CAUTION · Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to avoid damaging the windshield wipers.
· Make sure that side view mirrors, aux-
iliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Otherwise there is risk of the machine dislodging them.
· Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-
plated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can permanently stain chrome-plated wheels.
WARNING · When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes, including the parking brake, several times in order to remove any moisture from the brake linings.
· Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This constitutes a fire risk.
Related information
· Polishing and waxing (p. 361) · Cleaning the interior (p. 362) · Washing the car (p. 360)
Polishing and waxing
Normally, polishing is not required during the
first year after delivery, however, waxing may
be beneficial.
· Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
10
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.
· After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
· Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.
· Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-
ishing a dull surface.
· A wide range of polymer-based waxes
can be purchased today. These waxes are easy to use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
· Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).
}} 361
10 Maintenance and servicing
|| CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of
long-life or durable paint protection coat-
10
ings, some of which may claim to prevent pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat-
ings have not been tested by Volvo for
compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat.
Some of them may cause the clear coat to
soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by
application of paint protection coatings
may not be covered under your vehicle's
paint warranty.
Related information
· Washing the car (p. 360)
Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product.
Cleaning the interior
Upholstery care Fabric Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/ fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. AlcanteraTM suede-like material Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a soft cloth and mild soap solution. Leather care Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather care kit formulated to clean and beautify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429. Cleaning leather upholstery 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do not rub.
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.
362
10 Maintenance and servicing
Protecting leather upholstery 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream
on a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the upholstery with light circular
Cleaning a leather-covered steering wheel
· Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp
sponge and a neutral soap solution.
CAUTION
Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage the leather on the steering wheel.
movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
CAUTION · Under no circumstances should gaso-
line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents be used on the plastic or the leather since these can cause damage.
· Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring can spread.
· Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-
vent can damage the seat padding.
· Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.
· Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing may damage the textile upholstery.
· Leather should be allowed to breath.
Never cover the steering wheel with a plastic protector.
· Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting
Cleaning the seat belts Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution.
10
and conditioning the steering wheel with Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.
Cleaning floor mats The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly, especially during
If there are stains on the steering wheel:
winter when they should be taken out for dry-
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia. For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl)
rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer. Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood
of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and
surfaces
wipe the stain.
Cleaning interior plastic components should
Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)
be done with a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
1. Same procedure as for type I stains.
retailer.
2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent paper or a towel.
· Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
Type 3 (dry soil or dust)
new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery.
1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. 2. Same procedure as for type I stains.
}} 363
10 Maintenance and servicing
||
CAUTION
· Do not use cleaning agents with high
alcohol content such as washer fluid
10
to clean instrument panel glass.
· Never spray cleaning agents or water
directly onto components with electri-
cal buttons or controls. Clean compo-
nents of this type by applying the
cleaning agent/water sparingly to a
cloth and wiping the components so
that no liquid penetrates into these
components.
Related information
· Washing the car (p. 360)
Touching up paintwork Paint damage requires immediate attention to avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. Touch-up if necessary. Paint repairs require special equipment and skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive damage. Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo touch-up paint. Color code
Sample color code: US models
Sample color code: Canadian models Make sure you have the right color. See Label information (p. 367) for the location of this label (label number 4 in the illustration).
Minor stone chips and scratches Material:
· Primer can · Paint touch-up pen · Brush · Masking tape
If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you can add paint immediately after removing dirt.
NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be clean and dry. The surface temperature should be above 60 °F (15 °C).
364
Repairing stone chips
1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush.
3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application.
4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off
5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish.
Related information
· Label information (p. 367)
G021832
10 Maintenance and servicing
10
365
SPECIFICATIONS
Label information The labels in your vehicle provide information such as the chassis number, paint code, tire inflation pressure, etc.
11 Specifications
11
}} 367
11 Specifications
|| Location of labels 11
368
List of labels Vehicle Emission Control Information. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the underside of the hood. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.
Engine oil. This label contains the recommended engine oil specifications.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.
Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This label also includes codes for paint color, etc. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper decal; Canadian models have the lower one. Related information
· Weights (p. 372) · Engine specifications (p. 373)
11 Specifications
11
369
11 Specifications
Dimensions This section lists your vehicle's most important dimensions. Dimensions
11
Position A B C D E F
370
Dimension Ground clearance (curb weight + 2 people)A Wheelbase Length Load length, floor, seatback down Load length, floor Height
in. (mm) 7.7 (195 ) 110.8 (2815) 190.5 (4838) 73.9 (1878) 42.9 (1089) 63.1 (1604)
Position G H
Dimension Load height Track, front
I
Track, rear
J
Load width, floor
K
Width
L
Width incl. door mirrors (folded out)
M
Width incl. door mirrors (folded in)
A Varies slightly depending on tire size, optional sport chassis, etc. B 16" 50 wheels C 17/18" 55 wheels D Models with the optional keyless drive
11 Specifications
in. (mm)
28.5 (724)
63.5 (1614)B 63.1 (1604)C
62.2 (1580)B
61.8 (1570)C
11
45.4 (1153)
73.6 (1870) 73.9 (1876)D
83.4 (2119)
75.8 (1925)
371
11 Specifications
Weights The following table lists important weight data for your vehicle.
Category
USA
Gross vehicle weight 11
Capacity weight
4-cyl. FWDA : 5100 lbs 5-cyl. AWDB: 5180 lbs All models: 900 lbs
Permissible axle weights, front
4-cyl. FWD: 2690 lbs 5-cyl. AWD: 2690 lbs
Permissible axle weights, rear
4-cyl. FWD: 2560 lbs 5-cyl. AWD: 2645 lbs
Curb weight
3890 - 4100 lbs
Max. roof load
220 lbs
Max. trailer weights
Without brakes: 1650 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8" ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 2" ball: 3,300 lbs
Max. tongue weight
165 lbs
A Front Wheel Drive B All Wheel Drive
Related information
· Loading specifications (p. 301) · Loading specifications load limit (p. 301)
372
Canada 4-cyl. FWDA : 2310 kg 5-cyl. AWDB: 2350 kg All models: 410 kg 4-cyl. FWD: 1220 kg 5-cyl. AWD: 1220 kg 4-cyl. FWD: 1160 kg 5-cyl. AWD: 1200 kg 1760 - 1870 kg 100 kg Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8" ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2" ball: 1500 kg 75 kg
11 Specifications
Engine specifications The following table provides technical data for the respective engines. Engine specifications for Special Edition vehicles may vary.
Engine specifications Specification/Model
Some of the engines listed here may not be available in all markets. 5-cyl.
2.0 4-cyl. T11
Engine designation Output (kW/rps)
B5254T12 187/90
B4204T11 11
179/93
Output (hp/rpm)
250/5400 rpm
240/5600
Torque (Nm/rps)
360/30-70
350/25-75
Torque (ft. lbs./rpm)
266/1800-4200
258/15004500
No. of cylinders
5
4
Bore (in/mm)
3.27/83
3.23/82
Stroke (in/mm)
3.63/92.3
3.67/93.2
Displacement
2.497 liters / (152.4 cu. in.)
1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.)
Compression ratio
9.5:1
10.8:1
Related information
· Coolant specification and volume
(p. 376)
· Oil specifications (p. 374) · Oil volume (p. 375)
373
11 Specifications
Oil specifications Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine protection.
Volvo recommends:
good fuel economy and engine protection. See the viscosity chart.
11
Refer to the warranty and Service Records information booklet for information on oil change intervals and oil type requirements.
NOTE
This vehicle comes from the factory with synthetic oil.
Oil additives must not be used. Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide
Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 requirements is recommended for extreme driving conditions.
CAUTION
4-cylinder engines only: Volvo oil VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recommended for extreme driving conditions. This oil must never be used in 5- or 6-cylinder engines.
Related information
· Oil volume (p. 375) · Engine compartment engine oil (p. 329)
374
11 Specifications
Oil volume The following table provides technical data for the respective engines. Some of these
engines may not be available in all markets. Engine specifications for Special Edition vehicles may vary.
Engine model
Approx. volume (incl. filter)
3.2 (6-cyl.)
B6324S4/S5
7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)
3.0T (6 cyl.)
B6304T4
7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)
11
All 4-cyl. engines
5.7 US qts (5.4 liters)
Related information
· Engine compartment engine oil (p. 329) · Oil specifications (p. 374)
375
11 Specifications
Coolant specification and volume
Transmission oil specification and
The table lists coolant volumes and specifica-
volumes
tions.
The table lists transmission oil1 volumes and
System Volume
Specifica-
specifications.
tion
Auto-
Volume
Specifi-
3.2 (6-
9.4 US qts. Coolant with
11
cyl.)/3.0T All 4-cyl. engines
(8.9 liters) 8.8 US qts. (8.3 liters)
corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix),
see packag-
ing.
matic transmission TF-80SC
TG-81SC
cation
7.4 US qts (7 liters) 7 US qts ( 6.6 liters)
Transmission fluid AW1
Related information
· Engine compartment coolant (p. 331)
TF-71SC
7.1 US qts (6.8 liters)
Related information
· Label information (p. 367)
Brake fluid specification and volume Brake fluid transfers braking force when the brake pedal is depressed to the master cylinder and to the slave cylinders on each wheel.
Specification: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C) Volume: 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters)
Related information
· Engine compartment brake fluid (p. 332)
1 Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
376
11 Specifications
Power steering specification
Fuel tank volume specification and
Air conditioning specification and
This fluid is used to help reduce and regulate
volume
volume
steering force.
The table lists the fuel tank volume for your
The air conditioning system in your vehicle
Specification:Power steering fluid recom-
vehicle.
contains the following:
mended by Volvo.
Volume
Specification
Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)
Related information
· Engine compartment power steering
fluid (p. 333)
18.5 US gallons (70 lit- ers)
Volume: 1.7 lbs (770 g) Compressor oil: PAG
11
Related information
· Refueling opening/closing fuel filler door
(p. 277)
· Refueling opening/closing fuel cap
(p. 278)
· Refueling octane rating (p. 276) · Engine specifications (p. 373)
377
11 Specifications
Battery specifications If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).
General information
12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alternator. Single pole system in which the chassis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the chassis.
WARNING
11
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Motor
Voltage (V)
Engines with Start/Stop*
12
All other engines
12
A AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries have to be used on models with Start/Stop
Cold start capacity CCA (Cold Cranking Amperes) (A)
800A 520800
378 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11 Specifications
Symbols general information The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed information can be found.
Introduction The symbols in the vehicle's various displays are divided into three main categories:
· Warning symbols · Indicator symbols · Information symbols
The following tables list the most common symbols, their meaning and the pages in this manual that provide more detailed information.
NOTE
Not all of the symbols shown in the related articles are available in all models or on all markets. Local variations may occur.
driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems.
Related information
· Information displays indicator symbols
(p. 72)
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
· Information display messages (p. 113)
Warning symbol : The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display.
Information symbol : The information symbol illuminates and
a text message is displayed to provide the
Warning symbols The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed information can be found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
main instruments panel's display.
11
: The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems.
}} 379
11 Specifications
||
Symbols in the main instrument panel
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Description
See
Low oil pressure
(p. 74)
11
Parking brakeA
(p. 74)
SRS airbags
(p. 74)
Indicator symbols The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed information can be found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and
Symbol Description Stability system, Hill Descent Control, Trailer Stability Assist* Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS) Low fuel level
See (p. 72)
(p. 72) (p. 72)
Seat belt reminder Generator not charging Fault in the brake system Warning symbol
(p. 74) (p. 74) (p. 74) (p. 74)
A The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital instrument panel.
Related information
· Information displays indicator symbols
(p. 72)
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
· Information display messages (p. 113)
a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems.
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Description
See
Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)*system
(p. 72)
Malfunction indicator (p. 72) light
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(p. 72)
Rear fog lights on
(p. 72)
Information symbol, see text in information display High beam indicator
(p. 72) (p. 72)
Left turn signal indicator Right turn signal indicator Stability system , Sport mode
(p. 72) (p. 72) (p. 176)
Related information
· Information displays indicator symbols
(p. 72)
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
· Information display messages (p. 113)
380 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11 Specifications
Information symbols The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed information can be found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems.
Information symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Description
See
Adaptive Cruise Control *
(p. 184)
Adaptive Cruise Control *
(p. 184)
Adaptive Cruise Control *
(p. 184)
Adaptive Cruise Control * (Distance alert)
(p. 184)
Radar sensor*
(p. 193)
Symbol Description Camera sensor, laser sensor
See (p. 215) (p. 208)
Collision Warning with Full Autobrake and Pedestrian Detection* Active Bending Lights (ABL)*
(p. 220) (p. 92)
Driver Alert System*
(p. 222)
Driver Alert System*
(p. 222)
Parking brake
(p. 268)
Rain sensor*
(p. 98)
Active High Beams (AHB)* Windshield sensor*
(p. 90) (p. 90)
Symbol Description
See
Driver Alert System* (Lane Departure Warning)
(p. 227)
Driver Alert Sys-
(p. 227)
tem* (Lane
Departure Warning)
11
Driver Alert Sys-
(p. 227)
tem* (Lane Departure Warning)
Fuel tank on passenger's side of the vehicle
(p. 277)
Related information
· Information displays indicator symbols
(p. 72)
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
· Information display messages (p. 113)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 381
11 Specifications
Information symbols ceiling console The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed information can be found.
Information symbols center console The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed information can be found.
Symbol Description BluetoothTM hands-free
See Sensus Infotainment supplement
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
11
main instruments panel's display.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display.
HD radio Park Assist*
Sensus Infotainment supplement (p. 232)
: The information symbol illuminates and
: The information symbol illuminates and
a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems.
a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems.
Related information
· Information displays indicator symbols
(p. 72)
Symbol Description Seat belt reminder
See (p. 30)
Symbol Description Audio files
See Sensus Infotainment sup-
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
· Information display messages (p. 113)
Occupant Weight Sen- (p. 36)
plement
sor
CD folder
Sensus Info-
Related information
· Information displays indicator symbols
(p. 72)
Video files
tainment supplement Sensus Info-
· Information displays warning symbols
(p. 74)
tainment supplement
· Information display messages (p. 113)
Bluetooth-
Sensus Info-
connected cell tainment sup-
phone
plement
382 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11 Specifications
11
383
12 Index
A
Approach lighting.............................. 97, 155
checking fluid level............................. 332
Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 104
emergency brake assistance.............. 268
12
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 267
Accessory installation warning.................. 23
Active chassis system............................. 175
Active high beams..................................... 90
Active yaw control........................... 175, 176
Adaptive brake lights............................... 267
Adaptive cruise control.................... 184, 185
Airbags disconnecting the front passenger's side....................................................... 36 front...................................................... 32
Automatic locking retractor....................... 47 Automatic transmission
Eco (driving function).......................... 261 Geartronic........................................... 253 general description..................... 251, 253 oil........................................................ 376 shiftlock override................................ 255 Axle weight.............................................. 301
B
fluid..................................................... 376 general information............................. 265 Hill Descent Control.................... 263, 264
Bulbs cargo area lighting.............................. 340 headlights... 334, 335, 336, 337, 338, 339 introduction......................................... 334 license plate lights.............................. 340 side marker lights............................... 339 specifications...................................... 341 taillight................................................ 339
inflatable curtain................................... 41 side impact........................................... 39
Battery maintenance............................... 346, 347
C
Air conditioning........................................ 131 Air distribution.................................. 126, 133 Air distribution table................................. 135 Air vents................................................... 126 Alarm........................................ 171, 172, 173 All Wheel Drive......................................... 263 Ambient temperature sensor..................... 77 Anti-freeze....................................... 274, 331 Anti-lock brake system
warning light......................................... 73 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 267
remote key, replacing......................... 160 replacing............................................. 347 specifications...................................... 378 start/stop............................................ 378 warning symbols................................. 345
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 240
Booster cushion, integrated.......... 57, 59, 60
Booster cushions....................................... 53
Brake lights.............................................. 267
Brake system ABS..................................................... 267 Brake pad inspection.......................... 265
Camera, Park Assist................................ 236
Capacity weight....................................... 301
Cargo area changing bulbs................................... 340 floor rails............................................. 144 hooks for securing loads............ 144, 145 steel grid............................................. 149
Cargo area cover..................................... 149
Cargo area net......................................... 147
Cargo net................................................. 147
Catalytic converter................................... 279
384
12 Index
Central locking system, introduction 152, 153, 156, 159
Collision warning system.. 209, 211, 214, 215, 217, 218
Disconnecting the front passenger's airbag............................................................. 36
Chains...................................................... 304 Compass in rearview mirror..................... 105 Distance Alert.......................................... 198
Check Engine warning light....................... 73 Connected service booking..................... 325 Dome lighting............................................. 96
Child restraints
Conserving electrical current................... 273 Door mirrors..................................... 102, 103
recalls and registration......................... 47 Convertible seats....................................... 51 Driver alert....................... 222, 223, 224, 225
Child restraint systems.............................. 47 Coolant............................................ 331, 376
Lane Departure Warning..... 227, 229, 230
booster cushions.................................. 53 convertible seats.................................. 51 infant seats........................................... 49
Cooling system, general information....... 273 Courtesy lighting........................................ 96
Driver distraction warning.......................... 23 Driving economically................................ 279
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 54 top tether anchors................................ 56
Crash event data....................................... 18 Crash mode......................................... 44, 45
Driving in cold weather............................ 274 Driving through water.............................. 272
12
Child safety................................................ 45 booster cushions.................................. 53 child restraint systems.......................... 47 convertible seats.................................. 51 infant seats........................................... 49
Cruise control.................................. 181, 183 adaptive.............................................. 184
Curb weight............................................. 301
Current, conserving................................. 273
E
ECC......................................... 129, 130, 131
Child safety locks...................................... 61 Cyclist detection.............................. 213, 217 Eco (driving function)............................... 261
City safety........................................ 202, 203
Eco coast................................................. 261
Climate system........................................ 132 air distribution..................... 126, 133, 135 air vents.............................................. 126 Interior Air Quality System.................. 125 introduction......................................... 124 passenger compartment filter............ 125 refrigerant........................................... 124
Clock, setting............................................. 78
D
Daytime running lights............................... 89 Defroster.................................................. 132 Detachable key blade...................... 157, 158 Dimensions
XC70................................................... 370
Eco guide................................................... 71 Economical driving.................................. 279 Electrically heated steering wheel............. 88 Electrical sockets..................................... 140 Electric parking brake...... 268, 269, 270, 271 Electronic Climate Control............... 128, 131
air distribution table............................ 135
Cold weather driving................................ 274
385
12 Index
F Interior Air Quality System.................. 125
G
ventilated seats................................... 130
Electronic oil level sensor........................ 330 Federal Clean Air Act............................... 322 Garage door opener
Electronic stability control....................... 175 Emergency locking retractor...................... 47 Emergency starting.................................. 250
Flat tires repairing with tire sealing system....... 313
Floor mats cleaning.............................................. 363
HomeLink® Wireless Control System........................................ 108, 109
Gasoline requirements............................. 276
Gas tank volume...................................... 377
Emergency towing........................... 284, 285
placing correctly................................. 246 Gauges...................................................... 68
Emission inspection readiness................ 325
Floor rails................................................. 144
Geartronic................................................ 253
12
Engine overheating........................................... 75 specifications...................................... 373 Start/Stop........... 256, 257, 258, 259, 260
Fluid specifications.......................... 376, 377
Fog lights................................................... 73 rear........................................................ 94
Geartronic automatic transmission.......... 253 Generator warning light............................. 75 Glossary of tire terminology..................... 302
starting................................................ 246
Four C (active chassis system)................ 175
Grocery bag holder.................................. 146
switching off............................... 248, 249 Engine compartment overview................ 328
Front airbags.............................................. 32 disconnecting passenger's side airbag 36
Gross vehicle weight............................... 301
Engine oil................................................. 374 Front park assist.............................. 232, 236
checking............................................. 329 low pressure warning light.................... 74
Front seats................................................. 80 heated................................................. 129
H
volumes.............................................. 375 Fuel filler cap........................................... 278 Hazard warning flashers............................ 94
Engine remote start (ERS)........................ 248 Fuel filler door, opening................... 277, 278 Headlights
Environment............................................... 22
Fuel level warning light.............................. 73 Fuel requirements............................ 275, 276
Active Bending Lights........................... 92 active high beams................................. 90 changing bulbs... 335, 336, 337, 338, 339
Fuel tank volume..................................... 377
daytime running lights.......................... 89
Fuses....................................... 348, 350, 357
high/low beams.................................... 90 high beam flash.................................... 90
tunnel detection.................................... 92
386
12 Index
J Headlight washers..................................... 99 Indicator lights............................... 68, 70, 74
Head restraints, rear seat.................... 84, 85 Heated front seats................................... 129 Heated oxygen sensors........................... 279
Infant seats................................................ 49 Inflatable Curtain........................................ 41 Inflation pressure............................. 296, 297
Jack attaching............................................. 291 location of........................................... 291
Heated rear seats.................................... 129 Inflation pressure table............................ 300 Jump starting........................................... 250
Heated steering wheel............................... 88 Information and warning symbols, table
Heated windshield........................... 104, 132 of.............................................................. 379
K High beams................................................ 90 Information lights........................... 68, 70, 74
active.................................................... 90
Inspection readiness................................ 325
Key blade. 152, 153, 156, 157, 158, 159, 162
Hill Descent Control......................... 263, 264 Instrument lighting..................................... 93
private locking.................................... 158
12
Hill Start Assist (HSA).............................. 251
"theater" lighting................................... 93
Keyless drive............................................ 161
Hoisting the vehicle................................. 324 Instrument overview............................ 64, 68
general description............. 162, 163, 164
HomeLink® Wireless Control
Instrument panel........................ 68, 112, 113
starting the vehicle............................. 246
System............................................. 108, 109 Integrated two-stage booster
Keyless locking/unlocking....................... 161
Home safe lighting..................................... 97 cushion.......................................... 57, 59, 60
Hood, opening/closing............................ 327 Interior Air Quality System....................... 125
Horn........................................................... 88
Interior lighting........................................... 96
L
Internet connection booking service.................................. 325
Labels list of................................................... 369
I
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 54
location of........................................... 368
ID, Volvo.................................................... 21 Ignition modes..................................... 78, 79 Immobilizer.............................................. 154 Important information.......................... 13, 14
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 227, 229, 230
LATCH anchors......................................... 54 Leather care............................................. 362 Lighting panel............................................ 89
387
12 Index
Loading
Moonroof......................................... 106, 107 Ownership, changing................................. 18
floor rails............................................. 144 hooks for securing loads............ 144, 145
Motor oil checking............................................. 329
Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 279
Loading the vehicle.................. 142, 143, 301
volumes.............................................. 375
roof loads............................................ 142
P
Locking.................................... 165, 166, 167
N tailgate................................................ 168
Paint, touching up.................................... 364
Locking the vehicle.................................. 155 Locks, child safety..................................... 61
Net in cargo area..................................... 147
Park assist....................................... 232, 236 Park Assist Camera................................. 236
Low beams................................................ 90
12
O Low oil pressure warning light................... 74
Parking brake
electric, applying/releasing. 268, 269,
270,
271
M
Main instrument panel..................... 112, 113
Maintenance............................................ 322 hoisting the vehicle............................. 324 performed by the owner..................... 323
Malfunction indicator light......................... 73
Messages in the instrument panel... 112, 113
Mirrors defroster............................................. 104 power door................................. 102, 103 rearview, auto-dim function................ 104 retractable................................... 102, 103 vanity.................................................. 141
Occupant safety........................................ 26 Occupant weight sensor............................ 36 Octane recommendations....................... 276 Odometer, trip........................................... 78 Oil
checking............................................. 329 volumes.............................................. 375 Oil level sensor........................................ 330 Oil quality................................................. 374 OK button........................................ 112, 113 On Call Roadside Assistance.................... 24 Outside temperature sensor...................... 77 Overhead courtesy lighting........................ 96 Overheating, engine................................... 75
warning light......................................... 74
Parking lights............................................. 93
Pedestrian detection........................ 214, 217
Polishing.................................................. 361
Power front seat memory function................................... 81
Power meter.............................................. 71
Power mirrors.................................. 102, 103 defroster............................................. 104
Power moonroof.............................. 106, 107
Power steering adjustable........................................... 179 fluid..................................................... 333
Power steering fluid................................. 377
Power tailgate.................................. 169, 170
388
12 Index
Power windows....................................... 100
fuel filler door.............................. 277, 278 Seat belts
laminated glass................................... 101
fuel tank volume................................. 377
Automatic locking retractor/Emer-
Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 30 Registering child restraints........................ 47
gency locking retractor......................... 47
Private locking......................................... 158 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 250, 348, 378
Remote control private locking.................................... 158
buckling................................................ 29 maintenance......................................... 29 pretensioners........................................ 28
Remote key...................... 152, 153, 156, 159
reminder................................................ 30
approach lighting................................ 155
reminder warning light.......................... 74
R
immobilizer......................................... 154
securing child restraint systems.... 49,
key blade.... 152, 153, 156, 157, 158, 159
51,
53
Rails, floor................................................ 144
locking the vehicle.............................. 155
unbuckling............................................ 29
Rain sensor................................................ 98 Rear fog lights............................................ 94
replacing the battery........................... 160 unlocking the vehicle.......................... 155
use during pregnancy........................... 30 using..................................................... 28
12
Rear park assist............................... 232, 236
Reporting safety defects............................ 27
Seats, front.......................................... 80, 81
Rear seat head restraints........................... 85
Roadside Assistance................................. 24
Sensus..................................................... 111
Rear seats center head restraint............................. 84
Road sign information (RSI)..................... 179 Roof loads............................................... 142
Service connected service booking................ 325
folding............................................. 84, 86 heated................................................. 129
Shiftlock..................................................... 14 override............................................... 255
Rearview mirror
S
Side door mirrors............................. 102, 103
auto-dim function............................... 104 compass............................................. 105 Rear window defroster............................ 104 Recalls....................................................... 26 Recalls, child restraints.............................. 47 Refrigerant............................................... 377
Safety, occupant........................................ 26 Safety defects, reporting........................... 27 Safety mode.............................................. 44 Seat belt
reminder................................................ 30
Side impact airbags................................... 39 Side marker lights, changing bulbs......... 339 Sign information (RSI).............................. 179 Snow chains............................................ 304 Snow tires........................................ 304, 305 Spare tire................................................. 294
Refueling.......................................... 275, 276 fuel filler cap....................................... 278
Spin control..................................... 175, 176
389
12 Index
T SRS............................................................ 31
spare................................................... 294
Stability system....................... 175, 176, 177
specifications...................................... 298
indicator light........................................ 73 Tailgate
speed ratings...................................... 298
Start/Stop (engine function)..... 256, 257, 258, 259, 260
locking/unlocking................................ 168 opening manually............................... 168 power operated.......................... 169, 170
storing................................................. 289 studded....................................... 304, 305 tire pressure monitoring system......... 306
Starting the engine.................................. 246
wiper/washer...................................... 100
tire sealing system.............................. 313
12
remote start........................................ 248 with keyless drive............................... 246
Starting the vehicle after a crash (crash mode).............. 44, 45
Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 154
Steel grid in cargo area............................ 149
Steering wheel adjusting............................................... 87
Tailgate wipers......................................... 344 Taillights, changing bulbs........................ 339 Temperature sensor
ambient................................................. 77 Temporary spare tire............................... 294 Three-way catalytic converter................. 279 Tire designations..................................... 298
tread wear indicator............................ 290 uniform tire quality grading................. 303
Tire sealing system.................................. 313
Top tether anchors (child restraint systems).......................................................... 56
Touching up paint.................................... 364
Towing a trailer........................ 281, 282, 283 trailer hitch.......................................... 282
heated................................................... 88 horn....................................................... 88 keypad.................................................. 88 Steering wheel paddles............................. 88 Stone chips, touching up......................... 364 Storage spaces........................................ 138 Studded tires................................... 304, 305 Sunroof (moonroof).......................... 106, 107 Sun shade................................................ 100
Tire inflation pressure.............................. 300
Tire Monitor............................. 310, 311, 312
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 306, 309 indicator light........................................ 73
Tires......................................................... 288 age...................................................... 289 changing from summer to winter........ 291 glossary of terms................................ 302 improving economy............................ 290 inflation pressure........................ 296, 297
Towing the vehicle........................... 284, 285
Traction control................................ 175, 176
Trailer towing........................... 281, 282, 283 trailer hitch.......................................... 282
Transmission general description..................... 251, 253 Hill Start Assist................................... 251 oil........................................................ 376 shiftlock override................................ 255
Supplemental restraint system.................. 31
inflation pressure table....................... 300 Tread wear indicator................................ 290
warning light......................................... 74
rotation............................................... 288 Trip computer.......................................... 115
Symbols, overview................................... 379
Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 313 snow........................................... 304, 305
Trip odometers.......................................... 78
390
12 Index
Trips, long distance................................. 273 Vehicle weights........................................ 372 Wheels..................................................... 288
Tunnel detection........................................ 92
Turn signals............................................... 95 changing bulbs................................... 338 indicator lights...................................... 73
Two-stage booster cushion........... 57, 59, 60
Ventilated seats....................................... 130 Volvo and the environment........................ 22 Volvo ID..................................................... 21 Volvo maintenance.................................. 322 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance.......... 24
changing............................................. 291 storing................................................. 289
Whiplash Protection System..................... 42
Windows power.................................................. 100 sun shade........................................... 100
Volvo programs......................................... 24 Windshield
U
Volvo Sensus........................................... 111
heated......................................... 104, 132
rain sensor............................................ 98
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 303
W Unlocking the tailgate.............................. 168
washers................................................ 99
wipers/washers..................................... 98
12
Unlocking the vehicle...... 155, 165, 166, 167
Warning flashers, hazard........................... 94
Windshield washer fluid........................... 344 Windshield wipers.................................... 342
Warning lights................................ 68, 70, 74
service position................................... 342
V
Vanity mirror............................................ 141 changing bulbs................................... 341
Vehicle dimensions XC70................................................... 370
Vehicle Event Data..................................... 18 Vehicle information.................................... 20 Vehicle loading........................ 142, 143, 301
roof loads............................................ 142 Vehicle maintenance................................ 322
Warning symbol......................................... 75 Warning system, collision........ 209, 211, 217 Warranties................................................ 322 Washer fluid............................................. 344 Washers
headlight............................................... 99 windshield............................................. 98 Water, driving through............................. 272 Waxing..................................................... 361 Weights.................................................... 372
Wiper blades replacing............................................. 342 replacing tailgate wiper...................... 344
performed by the owner..................... 323
391
12 Index
12
392
TP 18966 (USA & Canada), AT 1517, MY16, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2015, Copyright © 2000-2015 Volvo Car Corporation
UnknownApplication GPL Ghostscript 9.06